JP7066232B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and can be particularly applied to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

Conventionally, when a game ball passes through a specific area in the V attacker during a big hit game executed based on the judgment of a big hit in the big hit determination, the probability of being determined as a big hit becomes higher than usual. The game machine that causes it is known. This type of gaming machine includes a mechanism for distributing a gaming ball that has entered a V-attacker to a specific region or a non-specific region. Specifically, for example, a lid member that opens and closes a specific area is provided inside the V attacker, and when the lid member moves to the open position, the specific area is opened and the game ball can pass through the specific area. When the lid member returns to the closed position, the specific area is closed and the game ball cannot pass through the specific area. Then, the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area (passing rate) increases or decreases depending on the length of the time (opening time) in which the specific area is opened (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-245172

In a gaming machine provided with a specific area as described above, when the opening time when the specific area is in the open state is relatively long, it is natural that the gaming ball passes through the specific area, but the opening time is natural. Even if it is relatively short, it is possible that the gaming ball passes through a specific area. That is, there are normal passage and non-normal passage in the passage of the game ball to the specific area. Therefore, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it is desirable to be able to confirm whether or not the passage is normal.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of confirming whether or not the passage is normal when the gaming ball passes through a specific area. To provide.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention has adopted the following configuration.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
The main control unit that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control unit that controls the effect based on the command transmitted from the main control unit,
A special entrance that allows the game ball to enter during the special game,
A distribution member for distributing a game ball that has entered the special entrance to a specific area or an area other than the specific area is provided.
The main control unit
Judgment means that can execute judgment based on game ball detection,
A gaming state control means capable of controlling the gaming state when the determination is executed to a first gaming state or a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state .
When the result of the determination is a specific result, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game that can give a predetermined game profit to the player and a special game execution means .
A distribution operation control means capable of controlling the operation of the distribution member is provided.
The sub-control unit includes a predetermined notification executing means capable of executing a predetermined notification regarding the passage of the game ball to the specific area.
The game state control means
When the game ball that has entered the special entrance in the special game does not pass through the specific area, the game state after the special game is defined as the first game state.
When the game ball that has entered the special entrance in the special game passes through the specific area, the game state after the special game is defined as the second game state.
The distribution operation control means operates the distribution member in the first operation mode during the special game, and the second operation mode in which the game ball is more easily distributed to the specific region than in the first operation mode. There are cases where it is operated by
The main control unit
When the distribution member does not operate in the second operating mode but operates in the first operating mode and the game ball passes through the specific region during the special game, the first passing situation occurs. The first passage status command corresponding to the status is transmitted to the sub-control unit, and the command is transmitted to the sub-control unit.
When the distribution member operates in the second operation mode and the game ball passes through the specific area during the special game, a second passage status command corresponding to the second passage status occurs. To the sub-control unit
The predetermined notification execution means is
Based on the first passing status command, the first predetermined notification for notifying the occurrence of the first passing status can be executed in a predetermined period after the occurrence of the first passing status .
The gist is that , based on the second passage status command, the second predetermined notification for notifying the occurrence of the second passage status can be executed in a predetermined period after the occurrence of the second passage status .

According to such a gaming machine, during the special game in which the game ball can enter the special entrance, the distribution means does not operate in the second operating mode but operates in the first operating mode and the game. When the first passing situation in which the sphere passes through the specific area occurs, the first predetermined notification for notifying the occurrence of the first passing situation can be executed for a predetermined period after the first passing situation occurs. .. Further, when the distribution means operates in the second operating mode and the game ball passes through the specific area during the special game, the second passing situation occurs, and the second passing situation occurs for a predetermined period after the second passing situation occurs. 2 The second predetermined notification for notifying the occurrence of the passage status can be executed. Therefore, in a predetermined period after the occurrence of the first passage situation or the second passage situation, the player, the person concerned with the game hall, etc. can confirm the occurrence of the first passage situation or the second passage situation. .. Here, it can be said that the first passing situation is a situation in which the game ball passes through the specific area even though the possibility that the game ball is distributed to the specific area is relatively low, and it is not a normal passing situation. On the other hand, the second passing situation is a situation in which the game ball passes through the specific area while the possibility that the game ball is distributed to the specific area is relatively high, and it can be said that it is a normal passing situation. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the passage of the game ball when it has passed through the specific area is a normal passage through the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification.

According to the above invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of confirming whether or not the passage is a normal passage when the gaming ball passes through a specific area.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is the figure which shows the display which the gaming machine includes. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of big hit and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (D) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a normal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit / miss determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a process during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart of a hit / fail determination process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart of a hit / fail determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing (big hit game). It is a flowchart of V round processing. It is a flowchart of a large winning opening closing process. It is a flowchart of comparison judgment processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of a specific area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the start ball entry processing. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of a receive interrupt process. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the fluctuation production start. It is a flowchart of jackpot history information processing. It is a schematic diagram of the 2nd prize-winning device. It is a table which shows the correspondence relation between the jackpot type and the movable piece operation timing in V round. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the 2nd prize opening sensor and the opening / closing (operation of a movable piece) of a specific area. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the history screen. It is a flowchart of the effect mode control process which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart of the effect mode control process which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart of the effect mode control process which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the effect mode which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing of the main part of the game board surface (game area) which concerns on Example 3. FIG. It is explanatory drawing of the main part of the game board surface (game area) which concerns on Example 3. FIG. It is explanatory drawing of the main part of the game board surface (game area) which concerns on Example 3. FIG.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following, the game medium used for the game is a game ball, and the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (ball game machine) capable of advancing the game by firing the game ball toward the game board surface. An example will be described.

The pachinko gaming machine illustrated below displays a variation of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the end of the variation display, the player is notified. It is a so-called "digi-pachi type (type 1 type)" gaming machine that enables a big hit game (special game) to which a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) can be given.

Further, in the following description, the front side (front) is simply the front side (front side) when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, and is the side on which the player is located during the game. Further, the rear side (rear side) is simply the back side when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. Furthermore, the upper side (upper side), lower side (lower side), left side (left side), and right side (right side) are the upper, lower, left, and right directions when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. For example, it refers to the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side in FIGS. 1 and 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is roughly classified into a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming board 2 is detachably configured from the gaming machine frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the gaming board 2 is removed from the gaming machine frame 50.

The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching a gaming board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the island equipment in the hall. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52, and the outer frame 53 are pivotally supported on one side end side and are configured to be openable and closable, respectively.

The front frame 51 is provided with a launch handle 60 for launching (launching) a game ball with a firing intensity according to a player's operation amount (rotation angle), and a game ball that stores and stores the game ball to the launcher side. A possible hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 61 are provided.

Further, the front frame 51 has a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (two of these) as operating means that can be operated by the player during the execution of the game effect executed as the game progresses. The effect buttons are collectively referred to as "effect button 63"). The effect button 63 can be used properly according to the type of game effect.

The first effect button 63a is configured to be movable up and down. The second effect button 63b is configured to be able to move back and forth and rotate in the left-right direction. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment of the present embodiment, as long as it can detect the input from the player, or the means by which the player directly contacts the button portion to input (for example, a haunting type). , Touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact type input means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects that a part of the player's body is close to each other and inputs the input.

Although not shown, the upper surface (top surface) of the upper plate 61 is provided with an operation lever that can be tilted at least in the front-back and left-right directions as an operation means that can be operated by the player.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66 and a speaker 67. The frame lamp 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and a substrate (LED substrate) on which the LEDs are mounted is placed in a predetermined decorative place so that light is emitted from the back surface side to the front surface side of the front frame 51. Be placed. The frame lamp 66 is also referred to as an "LED for frame decoration".

The game board 2 is a transparent game board configured by using a plate material made of transparent resin. On the surface of the game board 2, a game area 3 into which the game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down is formed by being surrounded by the rail member 4. Of the surface of the game board 2, at least a place where the game ball flows down is referred to as a game area. It should be noted that the game area can also be referred to as a portion surrounded by the rail member 4 (outer rail) (inside the rail member 4).

A ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4. The ball return prevention piece 6 is a component for preventing the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launcher side.

On the back surface side of the game board 2, a board surface lamp 5 (see FIG. 5) for decorating the game area 3 (board surface) is provided. The board lamp 5 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the board (LED board) on which the LEDs are mounted is such that light is emitted from the back surface side to the front surface side of the game board 2 (transparent game board). It is placed in a predetermined decorative place. The board lamp 5 (also referred to as “LED for board decoration”) is a game board such as a center decorative body 10, a decorative member 13, a movable decorative member 14, a large prize device, etc., which will be described later, in addition to the back surface side of the game board 2. It is also provided in various parts (also referred to as "board parts") provided in 2.

Further, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding the game ball are projected on the surface of the game board 2 (game area 3), and various effects are displayed near the center of the game board 2 (inside the game area). An image display device 7 is provided as an effect display means.

The image display device 7 is composed of a liquid crystal display, and is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 so that the display screen 7a faces an opening provided in the substantially center of the game board 2 (game area 3). .. The display screen 7a is visible from the surface side of the game board 2 through the opening.

The effect display means is not limited to the image display device (liquid crystal display), and the effect is displayed by elements other than the image, such as a dot type display and a drum (reel) type display. It may be a thing.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, there is an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as an “effect symbol display unit”) on which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as “effect symbol 8”) are displayed. It is provided. The effect symbol 8 performs variable display in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, which will be described later. As a mode of variable display, for example, there is a mode of scroll display in the vertical direction, left-right direction, diagonal direction, etc. In this embodiment, in principle, scroll display is performed from top to bottom. The effect symbol display area 7b is composed of, for example, three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the middle effect is displayed in the middle symbol display area. The symbol 8C is displayed, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right.

The staging symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of this embodiment are each composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", and in principle, "1" → "2" ... " The variable display (scroll display) is performed in the order of "8" → "9" (ascending order), and when it reaches "9", it returns to "1" and the variable display continues until the stop display. Depending on the combination of the left, middle, and right effect symbols (stop display mode) that are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b, the first special symbol display 41a (also referred to as "first special symbol display unit") described later may be used. The display result of the variation display of the first special symbol to be displayed, and the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as "the second special symbol display unit"). That is, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination (also simply referred to as “winning / failing determination”) is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. In this embodiment, the stop order of the staging symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are variablely displayed is, in principle, "left → right → middle".

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, a three-digit identical doublet (also referred to as a “big hit effect symbol”) such as “777” or a preset chance symbol such as “135” may be used. It is possible to stop and display the staging symbol with a special symbol (also referred to as "special symbol") such as "3 ★ 3". In addition, in the case of deviation, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is different, and the staging symbol is stopped and displayed with a different staging symbol (also referred to as "disappearing staging symbol"). Is possible. As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game such as the winning / failing determination by looking at the stopped display of the staging symbol. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather directs the effect. See and grasp the effect symbol displayed in the symbol display area 7b.

It is not necessary to separately provide the positions of the left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the left, middle, and right effect symbol display areas may be used as the entire symbol display area (effect symbol display area 7b). .. Further, in this embodiment, the left, middle, and right staging symbols 8 are displayed. For example, a matrix-shaped symbol display area of 3 rows and 3 columns is provided on the display screen to display 9 staging symbols. , The stop mode (stop symbol) of the effect symbol can be displayed by the arrangement of each row (symbol combination) of one vertical row, one horizontal row, and one diagonal row when each symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display, or the symbol display area (effect). The number of effect symbols and the mode of the symbol display area are not particularly limited, such as dividing the symbol display area) into a plurality of (for example, four) areas and performing variable display and stop display of three effect symbols in each area. ..

Here, any or all of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the staging symbol are referred to simply as "design" or "identification information". In addition, the normal symbol is "general symbol", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "special diagram 1" or "first special symbol", and the second special symbol is "special diagram 2" or "second". Also called "special figure". Further, it also refers to one or both of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is also referred to as a "special symbol (special symbol)". In addition, among the results of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, the "big hit" is also referred to as a "specific result", and the "missing" is also referred to as a "non-specific result". Further, among the stop display modes of the identification information, the stop display modes corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is "big hit" are referred to as "big hit mode", "specific display mode", "specific display result", etc. In some cases, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / miss determination is "off" may be referred to as "off mode", "non-specific display mode", "non-specific display result", or the like.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to the game effect using the effect pattern as described above (also referred to as “effect symbol game effect”), the big hit game effect (“special”) executed in association with the big hit game. Also called "game production"), demonstration production for waiting for customers, etc. are displayed. In these effects, in addition to the effect symbols such as numbers, the effect images other than the effect symbols such as the background image and the character image are also displayed. It should be noted that the staging pattern game staging is also referred to as "variable staging".

Further, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) that displays the first effect hold 9a according to the number of stored first special figure hold described later. A second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) for displaying the second effect hold 9b according to the number of stored second special figure hold described later is provided. Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first effect hold and the second effect hold, the number of stored first special figure hold and the second special figure hold indicator 43b displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a described later. The number of stored memories of the second special figure hold displayed in can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

A center decorative body 10 that surrounds the display screen 7a (effect symbol display area 7b) is provided near the center of the game board 2 (game area 3) and in front of the image display device 7. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll is provided in the lower portion of the center decorative body 10, and a hollow warp portion 12 is provided in the left portion of the center decorative body 10. Has been done.

The warp section 12 includes a warp inlet and a warp exit, and is a taxiway that receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp inlet, discharges the game ball from the warp outlet, and guides the game ball to the stage section 11. Is. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 is more likely to enter the first starting port 20 described later than the game ball not guided to the stage portion 11.

Further, a decorative member 13 in the shape of characters, figures, or the like is provided on the upper portion of the center decorative body 10. The decorative member 13 is configured to include an illuminated member such as an LED, and can be turned on according to a gaming state.

Further, a movable decorative member 14 that can be operated along with the game effect is provided above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward with the execution of a game effect having a relatively high possibility of a big hit, and the movable decoration When the member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, most of the member 14 becomes visible. As a result, the player will have a higher expectation for the big hit.

Below the image display device 7 (below the stage portion 11) in the game area 3, a fixed prize is provided with a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering the game ball (possibility of entering the ball) does not change. The device 19 is provided. When a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct (“1st special symbol”). (Also referred to as “hit / fail determination”) is executed, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination. That is, the variation display of the first special symbol (determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct) is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20.

A variable second starting port 21 is provided on the right side of the image display device 7 (right side of the stage portion 11) in the game area 3 so that the ease of entering the game ball (possibility of entering the ball) changes. A winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable starting port”) is provided. When a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 and a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct (“the second special symbol”). (Also referred to as “hit / fail determination”) is executed, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination. That is, the variation display of the second special symbol (the second special symbol hit / miss determination) is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21.

The first starting port 20 is also referred to as a "first determination ball entry port", and the second starting port 21 is also referred to as a "second determination ball entry port". Further, the first special symbol hit / miss judgment is also referred to as "first judgment", and the second special symbol hit / miss judgment is also referred to as "second judgment".

The variable winning device 22 includes an opening / closing member (blade member) 23, and opens / closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the opening / closing member 23. By this opening and closing, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first aspect (closed state) to the second aspect (open state) in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect. .. The opening / closing member 23 is driven by a second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In the present embodiment, the second starting port 21 is capable of entering the game ball only when the opening / closing member 23 is in the open state, and is unable to enter the game ball when the opening / closing member 23 is in the closed state. .. If the opening / closing member 23 is more difficult to enter when the opening / closing member 23 is in the open state than when the opening / closing member 23 is in the closed state, the second starting port 21 is completely closed when the opening / closing member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

To the right of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, the first large winning device 31 is provided with a variable first large winning opening 30 in which the ease of entering the game ball (possibility of entering the ball) changes. A second big winning device 36 provided with a variable second big winning opening 35 that changes the ease of entering the game ball (possibility of entering the ball) is provided. In this embodiment, the second big winning device 36 (the second big winning opening 35) is arranged directly above the first big winning device 31 (the first big winning opening 30).

The first major winning opening 30 is also referred to as a "first variable entry opening" or "first special entry opening", and the second major winning opening 35 is referred to as a "second variable entry opening" or "second variable entry opening". Also known as the "second special entrance". Further, it refers to either or both of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35, and is also referred to as a "large winning opening", a "variable ball entry opening", or a "special entry opening". Further, it refers to either or both of the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36, and is also referred to as a "large prize device", a "variable ball entry device" or a "special ball entry device".

The first prize-winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 has a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5) to stand upright and forward (see FIG. 5) with the lower side as an axis. It is possible to rotate (in the front-back direction) between the state of tilting to the front side). When the opening / closing member 32 is in the upright state, the first large winning opening 30 is closed, and when the opening / closing member 32 is tilted forward, the first large winning opening 30 is in the open state. When the first big winning opening 30 is opened, the game ball can enter the first big winning opening 30.

That is, the first large winning opening 30 is capable of entering a ball that cannot be entered (closed state, first state) and that the game ball can be entered by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. It is configured as a variable ball entry port that can be changed to a state (open state, second state).

The second big winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and opens and closes the second big winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. The opening / closing member 37 has a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5) to stand upright and forward (see FIG. 5) with the lower side as the axis. It is possible to rotate (in the front-back direction) between the state of tilting to the front side). When the opening / closing member 37 is in the upright state, the second large winning opening 35 is in the closed state, and when the opening / closing member 37 is in the forward tilted state, the second large winning opening 35 is in the open state. When the second big winning opening 35 is opened, the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 35.

That is, the second large winning opening 35 is capable of entering a ball that cannot be entered (closed state, first state) and that the game ball can be entered by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. It is configured as a variable ball entry port that can be changed to a state (open state, second state).

In addition, FIG. 3 shows a state in which the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 are in a state where the ball can be entered (the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 are each tilted forward). However, in reality, the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 are not in a state where they can enter the ball at the same time, and when the big winning opening becomes a state where they can enter the ball during the big hit game. , One of the big winning openings will be in a state where the ball can be entered, and the other will be in a state where the ball cannot be entered. Further, both the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 are in an incapable state during the interval between the rounds during the big hit game and during the big hit game.

Further, the second special winning device 36 is a specific area 39 (also referred to as a “V area” or a “first area”) through which a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35 (special entry opening) can pass. The game ball that has entered the non-specific area 49 (also referred to as “non-V area” or “second area”) and the second large winning opening 35 (special entry opening) is referred to as the specific area 39 or the non-specific area 49. It is configured to include a movable piece 150 for guiding (sorting) to. The movable piece 150 is also referred to as a "sorting member" or a "sorting means".

The movable piece 150 operates based on the number of game balls detected by the second large winning opening sensor 35a described later, and is driven by the movable piece solenoid 151 (see FIG. 5). When the movable piece solenoid 151 is OFF, that is, when the movable piece 150 is not operating (non-operating state, second distribution state), the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 is a non-specific area 49 (specific). It becomes impossible to pass through the specific region 39 by being guided (distributed) to the region (region other than the region). Normally, the movable piece 150 is in the non-operating state (second distribution state).

On the other hand, when the movable piece solenoid 151 is ON, that is, when the movable piece 150 is operating (operating state, first distribution state), the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 is guided to the specific area 39. It is possible (sorted) to pass through the specific area 39 (this is also referred to as "V passage").

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a high probability state described later is generated (occurs) based on the fact that at least one of the gaming balls that have entered the second major winning opening 35 passes through the specific area 39 (passes V). .. That is, the specific area 39 is a probabilistic operation port (probability change area). Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first large winning device 31. The second prize-winning device 36 and the second prize-winning opening 35 provided with the specific area 39 are also referred to as "V attackers".

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, which determines whether or not to generate a high-probability state based on whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 39 (whether or not the game ball has passed through V), is a so-called “V probability machine”. Is called. The high probability state is one of the game benefits given to the player separately from the special game.

Here, the configuration of the second prize-winning device 36 will be described. FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram showing the second prize-winning device 36. All the game balls that have entered the second special winning opening 35 pass through the predetermined game ball guiding passage in the second large winning device, and are all the second large winning opening sensor 35a (“ball entry detecting means” or “entry ball”. It also passes through the "detection sensor"). Therefore, the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 is always detected by the second large winning opening sensor 35a.

The second large winning opening sensor 35a is a sensor for detecting that a game ball has entered the second large winning opening 35 (the entry of the game ball into the second large winning opening 35). Based on the detection of the second big winning opening sensor 35a, it is possible to count the number of balls entered into the second big winning opening 35. That is, when the game ball is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the number of detected balls (that is, the number of balls entered) is the number of balls entered in the RAM of the main control unit 80, which will be described later (not shown). ) Is counted in round units. This counting result (counting value) is cleared at the end of the round.

Further, the gaming ball detected by the second large winning opening sensor 35a then passes through a predetermined gaming ball guiding passage and passes through a specific region 39 (first region) or a non-specific region 49 (second region). After that, it is discharged to the outside of the machine (the back side of the game machine 1). The specific area 39 can pass the game ball only when the movable piece 150 is operating (operating state, first distribution state), in other words, only when the specific area 39 is open (FIG. 48). See (b)).

The specific area 39 is provided with a specific area sensor 39a (also referred to as a “first passage detection means” or a “first passage detection sensor”), and a game ball passing through the specific area 39 is detected by the specific area sensor 39a. Will be done. The specific area sensor 39a is a sensor for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area 39 (first area) (passage of the game ball to the specific area 39).

The non-specific area 49 is provided with a non-specific area sensor 49a (also referred to as a “second passage detection means” or a “second passage detection sensor”), and the game ball passing through the non-specific area 49 is a non-specific area. It is detected by the sensor 49a. The non-specific area sensor 49a is a sensor for detecting that the game ball has passed through the non-specific area 49 (second region) (passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 49).

The specific area sensor 39a and the non-specific area detection sensor 49a are also sensors (also referred to as "emission detection means" or "emission detection sensor") for detecting the discharge of the game ball from the second special winning opening 35. It is possible to count the number of emissions from the second special winning opening 35 based on the detection of the specific area sensor 39a and the non-specific area detection sensor 49a. When the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a or the non-specific area detection sensor 49a, the number of detections (that is, the number of emissions) is the emission number counting means (not shown) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 described later. ) Is counted in round units. This counting result (counting value) is cleared at the end of the round.

Further, the number of game balls detected by the specific area sensor 39a is counted as the number of passages through the specific area by a specific area passage counting means (not shown) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80, which will be described later, and is a non-specific area. The number of game balls detected by the sensor 49a is counted as the number of non-specific region passages by a non-specific region passage counting means (not shown) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80, which will be described later. These counts are also performed in round units, and the count result (count value) is cleared at the end of the round.

In this embodiment, the control program of the main control unit 80 determines the number of balls entered and discharged from the second large winning opening 35 based on the counting results of the number of balls entered and the number of ejected game balls related to the second large winning opening 35. It is possible to make a comparison judgment with a number (comparison judgment means). Then, when the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls do not match as a result of the comparison determination, a predetermined error processing is executed (error processing means). By this comparison determination (match / disagreement determination), the presence or absence of an abnormality or fraud related to the entry into the second special winning device 36 (second big winning opening 35) having the specific area 39 is monitored.

For example, inside the second prize-winning device 36 (second prize-winning opening 35), in order to operate the movable piece 150 for opening and closing the specific area 39, the movable piece 150 is bitten by a game ball, and the second is second. There is a risk that the game ball will be clogged in the large winning device 36 (second large winning opening 35) (upstream side of the specific area 39 and the non-specific area 49). When such a ball jam occurs, the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 35 are not ejected, so that the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls do not match. By monitoring the number of balls entering and the number of balls ejected in this way, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of ball clogging. In addition, even when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a due to fraudulent acts such as so-called thread hanging goto or radio wave goto, the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls do not match. It is also possible to monitor and prevent unexpected damage from occurring.

In this embodiment, when such an event suspected of being jammed or fraudulent occurs, it is assumed that an error related to the mismatch in the number of input / output numbers of the second large winning opening 35 has occurred, and the predetermined error processing is executed. Details of the comparison determination between the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls and the error handling when the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls do not match will be described later.

Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to determine the occurrence of an error (abnormality) related to the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 by the control program of the main control unit 80. Specifically, when the second large winning opening 35 is open and the ball can be entered (second state), the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a (passage of the game ball to the specific area 39). When a specific area valid period is set and the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a in a period excluding the specific area valid period (a period other than the specific area valid period) (specific area sensor 39a). (When the detection is made by), it is assumed that an error related to the specific area 39 has occurred, and the detection is treated as invalid. Further, even when an abnormality occurs in the signal (specific area passing signal) of the specific area sensor 39a due to a connection failure or the like, it is possible to generate an error regarding the specific area 39. It is also possible to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity, device failure, damage, etc. by determining an error based on the specific area validity period or connection failure of the specific area sensor 39a, which causes unexpected damage. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

A gate 28 (game ball passage port) through which a game ball can pass is provided in the right side area of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3. Based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is opened. Along with the execution of the symbol winning / failing determination (also referred to as “normal symbol winning / failing determination”), the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second starting port 21 is opened.

Further, a plurality of general winning openings 27 are provided in the lower part of the game area 3. In this embodiment, four general winning openings 27 are provided, three of which are left general winning openings provided on the left side of the first starting opening 20, and one is the first large winning opening 30. It is a right general winning opening provided on the right side.

The first starting opening 20, the second starting opening 21, the first large winning opening 30, the second large winning opening 35, and the general winning opening 27 are each entry openings that trigger the payout of prize balls, and each entry opening. When a game ball enters the ball, a predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as "prize balls") are paid out at each entrance. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls in the first starting port 20 is "4", the number of prize balls in the second starting port 21 is "1", the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 27 is "10", and the first big prize is won. The number of prize balls in the mouth 20 and the second big winning mouth 35 is set to "15". The number of prize balls is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined.

In this way, a game area provided with a plurality of entrances (first starting opening 20, second starting opening 21, first large winning opening 30, second large winning opening 35, general winning opening 27, gate 28) and the like. 3 can be divided into a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. Launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is also called "left-handed", and launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is also called "right-handed". say. Further, the left game area 3A is also referred to as a "first game area", the right game area 3B is also referred to as a "second game area", and either the left game area 3A or the right game area 3B is referred to. Also called "specific area".

Of the plurality of entry openings provided in the game area 3, the first start opening 20 and the three left general winning openings 27 are capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left game area 3A of the game area 3. The second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, the second big winning opening 35, the right general winning opening 27, and the gate 28 flow down the right gaming area 3B of the gaming area 3. It is provided so that a game ball can enter.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game is started, in principle, the ball is aimed at entering the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, when the game condition changes due to a big hit in the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the first starting opening 20, in principle, the gate 28, the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30 and the second starting opening 20 are hit right. We will aim to enter the big winning opening 35.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main display 40 is provided on the lower right side of the game board 2 outside the game area 3 (outside the game area). As shown in FIG. 4, the main display 40 has a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and a variable display and stop of the second special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display unit) to be displayed, the normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of the normal symbol, and the hit / fail determination information related to the first special symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a that displays the number of stored items (first special figure hold) and the second special figure hold that displays the number of stored numbers of the hit / fail determination information (second special figure hold) related to the second special symbol. It is executed when the display 43b, the normal symbol display 44 that displays the stored number of the operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42, and the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit (specific result). A round display 45 indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game, a game state display 46 indicating that the probability fluctuation function is activated, and a firing direction of the game ball (whether it should be left-handed or right-handed) are shown. The launch direction indicator 47 and the hit indicator 48 indicating (notifying) whether the execution trigger of the jackpot game when the jackpot game is executed is the first special symbol hit / miss determination or the second special symbol hit / fail determination. And are configured to include. The various indicators constituting these main indicators 40 are displayed and controlled by the main control unit described later.

It should be noted that one or both of the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b is also referred to as a "special symbol display unit", and the first special symbol hold display 43a and the second special symbol hold display 43a and the second special symbol display are displayed. It also refers to one or both of the vessels 43b and is also referred to as a "special figure holding display unit".

In the special symbol display unit, the special symbol (identification information) is displayed as a stop after a predetermined time variation display, and the special symbol (stop symbol) that has been stopped and displayed is used to enter the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. The result of the lottery (special symbol winning / failing judgment, big hit lottery) based on the above will be notified. The special symbol displayed (stopped display) after the variable display is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols based on the result of the special symbol hit / miss determination. If the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is a hit symbol (specific display mode, specific display result) such as a predetermined large hit symbol or small hit symbol, an open pattern according to the type of the displayed hit symbol. A special game (big hit game) is performed in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened. That is, a special game (big hit game) can be actually performed based on the fact that the specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (1st large winning opening 30 and 2nd large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination. In this embodiment, the jackpot types when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is "big hit" (specific result) are "7R first jackpot", "7R second jackpot", and "15R third jackpot". Three types are provided (see FIGS. 6 and 8). The LED of the first special symbol display 41a can adopt a display mode (also referred to as "specific display mode" or "specific display result") corresponding to each of the three types of jackpots.

For example, when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is "7R first jackpot", the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off (7R first jackpot symbol). In the case of "7R 2nd jackpot", the 3 LEDs of "imn" are turned on and the rest are turned off (7R 2nd jackpot symbol), and in the case of "15R 3rd jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot". It is assumed that the three LEDs of "jln" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R third big hit symbol). Further, when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is "off" (non-specific result), one LED of "n" is turned on and the rest is turned off (off symbol).

On the other hand, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination. In this embodiment, there are two types of jackpots, "15R 4th jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot", when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is "big hit" (specific result) (15R 4th jackpot). 6 and 8). The LED of the second special symbol display 41b can adopt a display mode (also referred to as "specific display mode" or "specific display result") corresponding to each of the two types of jackpots.

For example, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is "15R 4th jackpot", the four LEDs of "acde" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R 4th jackpot symbol). In the case of "15R 5th jackpot", the 4 LEDs of "bfgh" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R 5th jackpot symbol). Further, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is "off" (non-specific result), one LED of "g" is turned on and the rest is turned off (off symbol).

Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special symbol is executed for a predetermined variable time. The mode of this variation display can be a mode in which each LED is turned on so that light repeatedly flows in a predetermined order, for example, in a clockwise direction or a counterclockwise direction. Further, the stop display mode of the first special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a is maintained until the variable display of the next first special symbol is started. Similarly, the stop display mode of the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b is maintained until the variable display of the next second special symbol is started.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various information such as a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct (“acquired information”” is obtained based on the entry. (Also referred to as) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure holding storage unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit. Specifically, if the ball enters the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit (not shown) as the first special figure hold, and the ball enters the second start port 21. For example, it is stored in the second special figure holding storage unit (not shown) as the second special figure holding. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is "4", respectively. The first special figure holding storage unit and the second special figure holding storage unit are also referred to as "first acquired information storage means" and "second acquired information storage means", respectively, and are also generally referred to as "acquired information storage means". ..

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the special symbol hold means to determine a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not corresponding to the special symbol hold, and to execute a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the variation display (hit / fail determination) of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 or the second start opening 21 cannot be immediately executed in response to the entry. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed or the special game is being executed, the right to determine whether or not the special symbol is correct for the incoming ball can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

The number of special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure holding display 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and the first special drawing is controlled by displaying and controlling the LEDs according to the number of the first special drawing holding. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is "0", both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds. When is "1", the display mode is such that the "u" LED is turned off and the "v" LED is turned on in red, such as "u □ v ●". The display mode is such that the "u" LED is turned on in red and the "v" LED is turned off, such as "v □", and when the number of holds is "3", both LEDs are turned on, such as "u ● v ●". The display mode can be set to light up in red, and when the number of holds is "4 (upper limit number)", both LEDs can be turned on in green as in "u ▲ v ▲".

Further, the second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and the number of the second special figure hold is obtained by controlling the display according to the number of the second special figure hold. Is to display. For example, when the number of holds is "0", the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on). “1” to “4” are also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure holding indicator 43a.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner and then displays the stop, and the normal symbol (stop symbol) displayed as a stop notifies the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols based on the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is correct. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 21 is opened with an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / miss determination depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed when both LEDs are lit, such as "s ■ t ■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). If the determination result is out of order, an out-of-order normal symbol in which only the LED of "t" is lit, such as "s □ t ■", is displayed. It should be noted that the off-normal symbol is not a specific ordinary symbol.

Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the mode of the fluctuation display, for example, both LEDs alternately turn on and off repeatedly. It is an aspect. Further, the stopped display mode of the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42 is maintained until the next variation display of the normal symbol is started.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also referred to as “acquired information”) such as a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct is acquired based on the passage, and various acquired information is acquired. Is temporarily stored as a normal figure hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. An upper limit is set for the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is "4".

The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine a random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not corresponding to the normal symbol hold, and to execute a variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be immediately executed according to the passage, that is, during the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. In some cases, the right to determine whether or not a normal symbol is correct for the passage can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

The number of the normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit is displayed on the normal figure hold display 44. Specifically, the normal figure hold display 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal figure hold. be. For example, when the number of holds is "0", both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds is set. When is "1", the display mode can be such that the LED of "q" is turned off and the LED of "r" is turned on in red, such as "q □ r ●". Further, the holding numbers "2" to "4" are also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure holding display 43a.

As shown in FIG. 4, the round display 45 is composed of two LEDs, a lamp for 7R and a lamp for 15R. In this round display 45, for example, when a 7R first big hit or a 7R second big hit occurs, the 7R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the corresponding big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, it has a display mode such as "7R (15R)" (for example, Δ: off, ▲: on). Further, when any of the 15R 3rd to 5th big hits occurs, the 15R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the corresponding big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is as shown in "7R △ 15R ▲" (for example, Δ: off, ▲: on).

As shown in FIG. 4, the hit indicator 48 is configured to include the three LEDs indicated by "b1 to b3". In this embodiment, after the above-mentioned jackpot symbol (specific display mode) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display 41a or second special symbol display 41b) (that is, a jackpot occurs). From), if the predetermined lighting conditions are satisfied until the big hit game related to the big hit is completed, the three LEDs "b1 to b3" are turned on in a predetermined manner, and the big hit (big hit game). It is supposed to display (notify) which of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment and the second special symbol hit / miss judgment is made.

Here, the jackpot of this embodiment includes a "V-passing scheduled jackpot" in which the game ball is scheduled to pass through the specific area 39 and a "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" in which the game ball is not scheduled to pass through the specific region 39. ", Is provided. In this embodiment, there are two types of big hits scheduled to pass V, "7R 2nd big hit" and "15R 5th big hit", and V passing big hits are "7R 1st big hit", "15R 3rd big hit" and "15R 3rd big hit". There are three types of "15R 4th jackpot" (see FIG. 6).

Then, when an irregular event related to V passage occurs, such as passing V in the jackpot game related to the V non-passing jackpot or not passing V in the jackpot game related to the V passing scheduled jackpot. , The hit indicator 48 is turned on in a predetermined manner. That is, as the lighting conditions of the hit indicator 48 (three LEDs of "b1 to b3"), (1) V passed during the jackpot game related to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, and (2) V passing scheduled jackpot. Two conditions are provided that the jackpot game is completed without passing through the V during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that the fact that V passed during the jackpot game related to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (normal V-passing) is also referred to as "normal V-passing", and the fact that V passed during the jackpot game related to the V-non-passing scheduled jackpot is "irregular". It is also called "V-passing", and the fact that V did not pass in the jackpot game related to the V-passing scheduled jackpot is also called "irregular V non-passing".

Specifically, when the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game related to the jackpot scheduled to pass through the V (when irregular V passage occurs), the jackpot game is the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination. If is based on the fact that is a big hit, "b1" and "b3", such as "b1 ■ b2 □ b3 ■" (for example, ■: on, □: off; the same applies hereinafter). If the LED is turned on and the LED of "b2" is turned off and the result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment is a big hit, "b2" is like "b1 □ b2 ■ b3 ■". And the LED of "b3" is turned on and the LED of "b1" is turned off.

In addition, when the jackpot game ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game related to the jackpot scheduled to pass through the V (when irregular V non-passage occurs), the jackpot game is the first special. If the result of the symbol hit / miss judgment is based on a big hit, the LEDs of "b1" and "b3" are turned on and the LEDs of "b2" are turned off, as in the case of passing through irregular V. If the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is based on a big hit, the LEDs of "b2" and "b3" are turned on and the LED of "b1" is turned on as in the case of passing through irregular V. Turn off the lights.

Further, in this embodiment, the hit indicator 48 (“b1 to b3”” also indicates that the jackpot game was completed without the occurrence of irregular events such as irregular V passage and irregular V non-passage during the jackpot game. It is a lighting condition of (three LEDs) (third lighting condition).

Specifically, the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game related to the V-passing scheduled jackpot and the jackpot game ends, or the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game related to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. If the jackpot game ends without passing through, if the jackpot game is based on the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination being a jackpot, then "b1 ■ b2 □ b3 □" As described above, if the LED of "b1" is turned on and the LEDs of "b2" and "b3" are turned off and the result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment is a big hit, then "b1 □ b2" (3) Like "b3 □", the LED of "b2" is turned on and the LEDs of "b1" and "b3" are turned off.

In this way, the hit indicator 48 can be used as a "big hit game in which an irregular event has occurred" or a "big hit game in which an irregular event has not occurred" depending on the lighting mode of the three LEDs "b1 to b3". It is possible to notify whether the execution trigger is the first special symbol hit / miss determination or the second special symbol hit / miss determination. Such notification by the hit display 48 is also referred to as "judgment notification", and the hit display 48 that performs judgment notification is also referred to as "judgment notification means", and the main control unit 80 that controls the display of the hit display 48. This is also referred to as a "judgment notification execution means".

The determination notification by the hit indicator 48 when the irregular V passage occurs is executed in a predetermined period after the occurrence of the irregular V passage (after the occurrence). In this case, the predetermined period (determination notification execution period) can be, for example, from the end of the jackpot game in which the irregular V passage occurs to the start of the next jackpot game. In this case, the determination notification is started based on the end of the jackpot game in which the irregular V passage has occurred, and the determination notification is terminated based on the start of the next jackpot game. Alternatively, it can be from the occurrence of irregular V passage during the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game after the big hit game. In this case, the determination notification is started based on the occurrence of the irregular V passage, and the determination notification is terminated based on the start of the next big hit game.

Further, the determination notification by the hit indicator 48 when the irregular V non-passage occurs is executed in a predetermined period after the occurrence of the irregular V non-passage (after the occurrence). In this case, the predetermined period (determination notification execution period) can be, for example, from the end of the jackpot game in which irregular V non-passage occurs to the start of the next jackpot game. In this case, the determination notification is started based on the end of the jackpot game in which the irregular V non-passage occurs, and the determination notification is terminated based on the start of the next jackpot game. Alternatively, it can be from the confirmation of irregular V non-passage during the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game after the big hit game. In this case, the determination notification is started based on the confirmation of irregular V non-passage (for example, the end of the V round described later), and the determination notification is terminated based on the start of the next big hit game.

Further, when the jackpot game ends without an irregular event occurring during the jackpot game (when the jackpot game ends normally), the judgment notification by the hit indicator 48 is performed after the end of the jackpot game (end). It will be executed in the specified period (after time). In this case, the predetermined period (determination notification execution period) can be, for example, from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. In this case, the determination notification is started based on the end of the big hit game, and the determination notification is ended based on the start of the next big hit game. Alternatively, it is possible to shift from the game state after the end of the big hit game (for example, the high accuracy high base state or the low accuracy high base state) to the start of the next big hit game. In this case, the determination notification is started based on the start of the game state (for example, the high accuracy high base state or the low accuracy high base state) after the end of the big hit game, and the determination notification is ended based on the start of the next big hit game.

In this way, an irregular event during a predetermined period (predetermined time) from the occurrence (confirmation) of irregular V passage or irregular V non-passage during the jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game after the end of the jackpot game. Can be set as the judgment notification execution period when Further, the predetermined period (predetermined time) from the end of the previous jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game can be set as the determination notification execution period when the jackpot game ends without the occurrence of irregular events.

In any case, by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (turning it off) and turning it on again (ON) while the judgment notification is being executed, the judgment notification is terminated (three pieces of "b1 to b3"). It may be possible to turn off all the LEDs of. By doing so, the manager of the game hall, a clerk (hereinafter, also referred to as “a person involved in the game hall”) or the like can operate the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to end the determination notification at an arbitrary timing.

Further, the end condition of the determination notification is not limited to the above-mentioned example (start of the next big hit game or power off of the pachinko gaming machine 1), for example, a high probability state or a time saving state (high base state) described later after the end of the big hit game. The determination notification is terminated based on the end of the specific gaming state when shifting to a gaming state (also referred to as "specific gaming state") that is relatively advantageous to the player such as, or a predetermined time (also referred to as "specific gaming state") from the start of the determination notification. It is also possible to end the judgment notification based on the elapse of the judgment notification time).

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a main control board 80 (also referred to as a "main control unit", which controls game progress and game profits, such as a special symbol hit / miss judgment, a normal symbol hit / fail judgment, and a transition of a game state. (Also referred to as a "unit"), a sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit", or "effect control unit") that controls the effect as the game progresses, and the payout of the game ball. A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”) that controls the above, an image display device 7, an effect display 102, an effect 1st special figure hold indicator 103a, an effect 2 special figure hold indicator 103b, and the like. It includes an image control board 100 (also referred to as an "image control unit") that controls display.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case for storing the main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, there is a main control board storage case. An image control board storage case containing the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board storage case containing the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. It is provided. Further, a payout control board case for accommodating the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for accommodating the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof. The power supply board 109 functions as a power supply means for supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 by receiving power supplied from the outside. Specifically, power is applied to various electric parts required for the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as various boards, devices / devices, sensors, switches, motors, solenoids, etc. provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Supply. The power supply board 109 is provided with a power switch (not shown) in a state of being exposed to the outside of the power supply board case. When the power switch is turned on, power supply is started, and when the power switch is turned off, power is supplied. Supply is stopped.

Further, in the upper right part of the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various signals (also referred to as "information about the game" or "external information") indicating the operating status of the gaming machine 1 are output to the outside of the gaming machine. An external terminal board 118 is provided. The external terminal board 118 is connected to an information output circuit (not shown) of the main control board 80, and the main control is performed by connecting the wiring of an external device (for example, a hall computer) to the terminals included in the external terminal board 118. It is possible to output various signals (external information) from the board 80 (information output circuit) to an external device.

The signals (external information) that can be output include, for example, a ball entry signal that can identify that there is a ball entry (passage) detection (detection by the game ball detection means) of a game ball into various winning openings or gates, special A special symbol signal that can identify the start (during fluctuation) and stop of fluctuation of the symbol, a big hit signal that can identify that the big prize device is operating (during big hit game), and the probability fluctuation function is operating (during high probability state). ), The probability fluctuation signal that can be specified that the fluctuation time shortening function is operating (during the time saving state), the opening time extension function is operating (during the high base state). There is an open extension signal that can be specified.

These various signals are generated by the main control board 80 (main control unit), and are output from the information output circuit (not shown) of the main control board 80 to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board 118. The main control board 80 (main control unit) that executes such processing related to signal output is also referred to as “information output means”.

A game control one-chip microcomputer 81 (also referred to as a “game control microcomputer”) that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a predetermined program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program or the like for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a game control program or the like stored in the ROM. The main control board 80 (main control unit) including the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a game control means for controlling the progress of the game.

The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-mentioned special figure holding storage unit (first special figure holding storage unit and second special figure holding storage unit) and the normal figure holding storage unit 86.

Various sensors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output to each solenoid from the main control board 80. Specifically, as the sensors, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, the specific area sensor 39a, non-specific The area sensor 49a and the general winning opening sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "game ball detecting means".

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball (ball entering the first start port 20) that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball (ball entering the second start port 21) that has entered the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball (passing through the gate) that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball (ball entering the first large winning opening 30) that has entered the first large winning opening 30. .. The second major winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second major winning opening 35 and detects a game ball (ball entering the second major winning opening 35) that has entered the second major winning opening 35. .. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 in the second large winning opening 35, and among the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 35, the game ball that has passed through the specific area 39 (passing through the specific area). Is to detect. The non-specific area sensor 49a is provided in the non-specific area 49 in the second large winning opening 35, and is a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 49 among the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 35 (non-specific area sensor 49a). It detects (passing through a specific area). The general winning opening sensor 27a is provided in each general winning opening 27 and detects a game ball (ball entering the general winning opening 27) that has entered the general winning opening 27.

The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80) is provided with an area for counting and storing the number of game balls detected by these various sensors (game ball detection means), and the game control microcomputer 81. The control (program) of 81 makes it possible to count the number of detections by each sensor (counting means).

Further, as solenoids, a second starting port solenoid 24, a first large winning opening solenoid 33, a second large winning opening solenoid 38, and a movable piece solenoid 151 are connected. These various solenoids are also called "electrical drive source" or "drive means".

The second start port solenoid 24 is for driving the opening / closing member 23 of the variable winning device 22, and the first special winning opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first special winning device 31. Is.

Further, the second prize-winning port solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36, and the movable piece solenoid 151 drives the movable piece 150 of the second prize-winning device 36. Is.

Further, on the main control board 80, a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol holding display 43a, a second special symbol holding display 43b, and a general drawing are used. A hold indicator 44, a round indicator 45, a game status indicator 46, a launch direction indicator 47, and a hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main display units 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and also receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. A payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). Is connected. The launcher 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is used to lend a game ball based on information stored in an inserted prepaid card (game value storage medium) or the like. It is a processing device.

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a predetermined program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program and the like for controlling payout of the game ball, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program and the like stored in the ROM.

The payout control microcomputer 116 uses the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls and pay out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for the counting.

When the player operates the handle 60 of the launcher 112 (see FIG. 1), the touch sensor 114 detects the player's contact with the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 is the launch handle 60. The amount of rotation is detected, and these detection signals are input to the launch control board 111. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with a staging control one-chip microcomputer 91 (also referred to as a “staging control microcomputer”) that controls the staging of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a predetermined program. .. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program or the like for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program or the like stored in the ROM. ing.

The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit), the image control board 100 (image control unit), the voice control board 106 (voice control unit), and the lamp control board 107 (lamp control unit) are displayed according to the game situation. As a staging control means (also referred to as "staging execution means") that controls various staging such as staging, sound staging, and lamp staging (light staging) to be executed by the corresponding staging device, member, etc. (staging means). It works.

The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 is used as the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (also referred to as “image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , The image display device 7, the effect display 102, the effect 1 special figure hold display 103a, and the effect 2 hold display 103b are controlled to display. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for expanding image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols, reserved symbols, etc.). And image data such as background images are stored. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 is composed of two LEDs, and the LEDs blink (variate display) and turn on or off (stop display) in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the effect symbol 8, and the two LEDs are turned on. -The display is controlled in a display mode showing the display result (result of the special symbol hit / miss determination) of the effect symbol 8 by turning off the light or combining colors. Further, the effect 1 special figure hold indicator 103a and the effect 2 hold indicator 103b are also composed of two LEDs. Then, the effect 1st special figure hold display 103a has the number of holds displayed on the 1st effect hold display area 9c and the 1st special figure hold display 43a by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining colors. The display is controlled in a display mode indicating the same number of reserved pieces. Similarly, the effect second special figure hold display 103b is the number of holds displayed on the second effect hold display area 9d and the second special figure hold display 43b by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining colors. The display is controlled in a display mode indicating the same number of reserved pieces as. Such an effect display 102 and a hold display 103a and 103b are provided by displaying a character symbol on substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit) or by operating a movable decorative member 14. By covering substantially the entire effect symbol display area 7b (effect symbol display unit) of the display screen 7a, the effect symbol 8, the first effect hold 9a, the second effect hold 9b, etc. are displayed on the display screen 7a. This is because a part or all of various images may not be visible. In addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be made to execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinguishing, light emitting color, etc.) of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and the lighting of the lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The movable decorative member 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. , The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data.

A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may be made to execute lamp lighting control or operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, the sub-control board 90 has a first effect button detection switch 63c and a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) has been operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.). 2 The effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, an operation signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90. It should be noted that one or both of the first effect button detection switch 63c and the second effect button detection switch 63d is referred to as an "effect button detection switch".

Next, matters related to determination based on entry into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (detection of a game ball by the first starting port sensor 20a or the second starting port sensor 21a) will be described. In this embodiment, there are "big hit" and "missing" as a result of the special symbol winning / failing determination. If the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display unit, and if it is "missing", the "missing symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display unit.

If the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the first big prize opening is an open pattern according to the type of the special symbol (big hit symbol) that is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display based on the result of the hit / miss judgment (big hit). A "special game" in which the 30 or the second prize opening 35 is opened is executed. A special game that is executed as a big hit is also called a "big hit game".

There are multiple types of jackpots. As shown in FIG. 6, the types of jackpots are "7R (round) 1st jackpot", "7R 2nd jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "15R 4th jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot". There are 5 types in total.

"7R 1st jackpot" and "7R 2nd jackpot" are jackpots in which the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is 7 times, and "15R". "3rd big hit", "15R 4th big hit" and "15R 5th big hit" are big hits in which the number of opening times (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is 15 times. Is. A jackpot with 7 rounds is also called a "7R jackpot", and a jackpot with 15 rounds is also called a "15R jackpot".

In this embodiment, the number of executions (number of rounds) of the round game (also simply referred to as “round”) constituting the jackpot game is 7R or 15R, but the number of rounds is a predetermined upper limit number of rounds (also referred to as “round”). For example, within the range of 16 rounds), it can be arbitrarily set in consideration of playability, ball ejection performance (specs), and the like.

In each round of the big hit game related to the big hit of this embodiment, one of the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 is open (the ball can be entered, the second state), and the other is closed. It becomes a state (a state in which the ball cannot enter, a first state). That is, the two big winning openings 30 and 35 do not open at the same time, but one of them opens.

Specifically, in the first round, the first big winning opening 30 (lower big winning opening) is closed and the second big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening) is opened, and in the second round, the first big winning opening is opened. 30 (lower big prize opening) opens and the second big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening) closes, and in the third round, the first big winning opening 30 (lower big winning opening) is the same as the first round. Closed and the 2nd big prize opening 35 (upper big winning opening) opens, and in the 4th round, the 1st big winning opening 30 (lower big winning opening) opens like the 2nd round and the 2nd big winning opening 35 (upper prize opening) will be closed. After that, every time the 5th and 6th rounds progress, the 1st big prize opening 30 (lower big prize opening) is closed and the 2nd big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening) is opened, and the 1st big prize opening. The opening of the winning opening 30 (lower large winning opening) and the closing of the second major winning opening 35 (upper large winning opening) occur alternately.

That is, in the big hit game of this embodiment, the second big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening) is opened in the odd round, and the first big winning opening 30 (lower big winning opening) is opened in the even round. The 1st big prize opening 30 (lower big prize opening) and the 2nd big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening) alternate with the opening of the 2nd big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening). Open. In addition, a predetermined interval time (closing time) is set between each round. In this embodiment, the interval time between the 7th round and the 8th round is 2000 ms (2 seconds), and the interval period between the other rounds is 500 ms (0.5 seconds).

Here, the big winning opening opening pattern during the big hit game will be described. In this embodiment, the opening patterns of the first prize opening 30 and the second prize opening 35 are the same. That is, in the odd round during the big hit game, the second big winning opening 35 is opened until 25,000 ms (25 seconds) elapses from the start of the round, and is closed after 25,000 ms (25 seconds) elapses to end the round. That is, the second large winning opening 35 is opened with an opening pattern of an opening time of 25,000 ms and an opening number of once. It is possible to easily enter a game ball into the second large winning opening 30 which is opened by this opening pattern by hitting right.

On the other hand, in the even-numbered round during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 is opened until 25,000 ms (25 seconds) elapses from the start of the round, and then closed after 25,000 ms (25 seconds) elapses to end the round. .. That is, the first large winning opening 30 is opened with an opening pattern of an opening time of 25,000 ms and an opening number of once. It is possible to easily enter a game ball into the first large winning opening 30 that is opened in this opening pattern by hitting right.

Further, in the seventh round during the big hit game, the second big winning opening 35 is opened, but in addition to this, based on the number of game balls (number of winning balls) that have entered the second big winning opening 35. The movable piece 150 is supposed to be operated. That is, when a game ball enters the second large winning opening 35, the entered game ball is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 35a, and the number of detected game balls (that is, the second large winning opening). The number of balls entered into 35) is counted by the number of balls entered counting means (not shown) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Then, when the counting value by the ball entry number counting means reaches a predetermined value, the movable piece 150 operates with this as an opportunity. The operation timing of the movable piece 150 is defined by this predetermined value (counting value).

The operation of the movable piece 150 includes a "first operation" in which the movable piece 150 in the non-operating state (second distribution state) is set to the operating state (first distribution state) and an operating state (first distribution state). ), There is a "second operation" in which the movable piece 150 is in a non-operation state (second distribution state). The operating state (first distribution state) is a state in which the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35 is distributed to the specific area 39 (first area), and the non-operating state (second distribution state) is. This is a state in which the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35 is distributed to the non-specific area 49 (second area).

The predetermined value (counting value) that triggers the operation of the movable piece 150 is the number of game balls (also referred to as "specified number") that are allowed to enter the second large winning opening 35 during one round. It is a value that does not exceed. In this embodiment, the values are a first predetermined value (first count value) C1, a second predetermined value (second count value) C2 which is a value larger than the first predetermined value C1, and a second predetermined value. Three predetermined values are provided with a third predetermined value (third count value) C3, which is a value larger than C2. Among them, the first predetermined value C1 and the second predetermined value C2 are values (also referred to as "first value") that trigger the execution of the first operation (second distribution state → first distribution state). The third predetermined value C3 is a value (also referred to as “second value”) that triggers the execution of the second operation (first distribution state → second distribution state). In this embodiment, the specified number of large winning openings is "9", and within the range of this specified number, the first predetermined value C1 is "1", the second predetermined value C2 is "2", and the third predetermined value C3. Is set to "9".

Here, as described above, the jackpot of this embodiment is provided with "V-passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". The V-passing scheduled jackpot is a jackpot on the premise that the gaming state after the jackpot game will be a high-probability state described later, and is substantially a “probability variation jackpot”. On the other hand, the V non-passing big hit is a big hit on the premise that the game state after the big hit game does not become the high probability state described later, and is substantially a "non-probability variable big hit" (also referred to as a "normal big hit"). Is.

In this embodiment, there are two types of V non-passing jackpots, "7R 2nd jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot", and V passing scheduled jackpots are "7R 1st jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot" and "15R 3rd jackpot". Where there are three types of "15R 4th jackpot" (see FIG. 6), predetermined values that trigger the operation of the movable piece 150 are set according to these jackpot types, and the jackpot type and predetermined value are set. The correspondence with the value is stored in advance in the ROM of the main control unit 80 (value storage means). The correspondence is shown in FIG.

As shown in the figure, among the first predetermined value C1 to the third predetermined value C3 that trigger the operation of the movable piece 150, the first predetermined value C1 is both the V non-passing jackpot and the V passing jackpot (all). The second predetermined value C2 and the third predetermined value C3 are set for the jackpot type), and are set only for the jackpot scheduled to pass through V (specific jackpot type). Specifically, the first predetermined value C1 is set for all (5 types) of the 7R first jackpot to the 15R fifth jackpot. On the other hand, the second predetermined value C2 and the third predetermined value C3 are not set for the 7R second jackpot and the 15R fifth jackpot, but are set for the 7R first jackpot, the 15R third jackpot and the 15R fourth jackpot. Will be done. Based on the correspondence between the jackpot type and the predetermined value that triggers the operation of the movable piece 150, the operation control of the movable piece 150 is executed in the seventh round of the jackpot game.

That is, in the seventh round of the big hit game, the counting value (the number of balls entering the second big winning opening 35) by the number of winning balls counting means becomes the first predetermined value C1, and the first operation of the movable piece 150 is executed. If so, the second operation is executed after the lapse of a predetermined first operation time after the execution. On the other hand, when the counting value by the ball entry number counting means becomes the second predetermined value C2 and the first operation of the movable piece 150 is executed, the counting value by the ball entry number counting means becomes the third predetermined value C3 after the execution. The second operation is executed. Further, in the case where the counting value by the ball entering number counting means becomes the second predetermined value C2 and the first operation of the movable piece 150 is executed, the counting value by the ball entering number counting means becomes the third predetermined value C3. If a second operation time longer than the above-mentioned first operation time elapses before the above-mentioned, the second operation is executed by the elapse of the second operation time. The operation control of the movable piece 150 is executed in the 7th round of the jackpot game related to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot and the 7th round of the jackpot game related to the V passing scheduled jackpot.

The relationship between the operation of the movable piece 150 and the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35 is as follows. As shown in FIG. 50, when the counting value (ball entry count number) by the above-mentioned entry ball count counting means reaches the first predetermined value C1 (“1” in this example), the movable piece 150 is in the operating state (movable piece solenoid). When 151 is turned on) and 80 ms (first operating time) elapses thereafter, the movable piece 150 is in a non-operating state (movable piece solenoid 151 is turned off). That is, when the first ball entered into the second large winning opening 35 is detected, the specific area 39 is opened (V open) for 80 ms (0.08 seconds). That is, the movable piece 150 is operated with an operation pattern of 80 ms of operation time (opening time) and one operation number of times (opening number of times). In this case, since the operation of the movable piece 150 is performed only for an extremely short time (momentary time) of 80 ms, the game ball (second large winning opening 35) that triggered the operation (also referred to as "first operation for a short time"). By the time the first (first) ball entering the game ball) passes through the second large winning opening sensor 35a and reaches the arrangement portion of the movable piece 150, the operation of the movable piece 150 is completed. It is very likely that it is (inactive) (see FIG. 48 (a)). Therefore, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 is extremely low. This short-time first operation is executed for both the V non-passing scheduled jackpot and the V passing scheduled jackpot.

Further, in the case of a big hit scheduled to pass through V, when the counting value by the above-mentioned ball entry number counting means reaches the second predetermined value C2 (“2” in this example), the movable piece 150 is in the operating state (the movable piece solenoid 151 is ON). After that, the round execution time (23000 ms in this example: 2nd) before the count value by the ball entry counting means becomes the third predetermined value C3 (“9” in this example) or the third predetermined value C3. After the lapse of the operating time), the movable piece 150 is in a non-operating state (the movable piece solenoid 151 is turned off). That is, when the second ball entered into the second large winning opening 35 is detected, the round execution time is until the ninth ball is detected or before the ninth ball is detected. The specific area 39 is in the open state (V open) until (the specified opening time of the second large winning opening) elapses.

Here, as long as the game ball is normally launched (right-handed) and flows down the game area 3 (right game area 3B) without delay during the big hit game, the lapse of the round execution time in one round (round game). It is normal for a specified number of game balls to enter the big winning opening before. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the second ball entering the second large winning opening 35 is detected (the counting value becomes the second predetermined value C2) and the movable piece 150 is activated, it is not. The return to the operating state is usually due to the detection of the ninth ball entering (the counting value becomes the third predetermined value C3). Therefore, in the operation of the movable piece 150 triggered by the counting value by the ball entry counting means becoming the second predetermined value C2, in principle, the movable piece 150 is operated until the counting value becomes the third predetermined value C3. The movable piece 150 is operated in the operation pattern set to the state (first distribution state). Since the operation of the movable piece 150 in this case is substantially performed in a relatively long time until the end of the round, the game ball (also referred to as "first operation for a long time") is a trigger for the operation (also referred to as "first operation for a long time"). By the time the game ball corresponding to the second entry into the second large winning opening 35) passes through the second large winning opening sensor 35a and reaches the arrangement portion of the movable piece 150, the movable piece 150 It is highly probable that the operation has not been completed (is in the operating state) (see FIG. 48 (b)). Therefore, there is an extremely high possibility that the game ball and subsequent game balls will pass through the specific area 39.

As described above, the movable piece 150 has a short opening pattern (also referred to as "first operation mode") in which the specific region 39 is opened for an extremely short time (80 ms) when the counting value by the ball entry counting means becomes the first predetermined value. It is also referred to as a long opening pattern (also referred to as a "second operating mode") in which the specific region 39 is opened for a longer time than the short opening pattern when the counting value by the ball entry counting means becomes the second predetermined value. ) Is operated. That is, in the operation mode of the movable piece 150, the first operation mode (first operation for a short time) and the game ball are more likely to be distributed to the specific area 39 than in the first operation mode (there is a possibility of passing through the specific area 39). There is a high) second operation mode (first operation for a long time).

Then, in the V non-passing jackpot, the movable piece 150 operates in the short opening pattern in the 7th round, but does not operate in the long opening pattern after that, and in the V passing jackpot, the movable piece 150 operates in the 7th round. After operating in the short opening pattern, it is possible to operate in the long opening pattern. That is, in the jackpot game related to the jackpot scheduled to not pass through V, the movable piece 150 (distribution means) does not operate in the second operating mode but operates in the first operating mode during the jackpot game (during the special game), and passes through V. In the big hit game related to the planned big hit, the movable piece 150 (distribution means) operates in the second operation mode during the big hit game (during the special game).

Therefore, in the V non-passing jackpot, even if the game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 in the seventh round, it is extremely unlikely that the game ball will pass through the specific area 39 during the round. The game state after the big hit game is unlikely to be the high probability state described later, in other words, the big hit is likely to be the normal state (low probability state) described later.

On the other hand, in the big hit scheduled to pass V, if two or more game balls enter the second big winning opening 35 in the seventh round, there is an extremely high probability that the game ball will pass through the specific area 39 during the round. , The game state after the big hit game is likely to be the high probability state described later, which is a big hit.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the seventh round of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is set to a high probability state based on whether or not the game ball has passed to the specific area 39. It is supposed to be. Such V rounds are also referred to as "privilege determination games" and "specific round games", and rounds other than V rounds are also referred to as "non-V rounds" and "normal round games". In addition, the jackpot game (special game) related to the V non-passing jackpot is also referred to as "first special game", and the jackpot game (special game) related to the V passing scheduled jackpot is also referred to as "second special game". ..

As described above, by controlling the operation of the movable piece 150 based on the number of balls entered into the second big winning opening 35 (V attacker) in the V round, the V-passing jackpot and the V non-passing jackpot can be determined. The opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 (V attacker) in the V round can be the same, and as a result, the game ball is set to the specific area 39 regardless of the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 (V attacker). Alternatively, it can be distributed to the non-specific area 49. Therefore, for the player, even if the movement (opening pattern) of the second large winning opening 35 (V attacker) is closely watched, it is difficult to determine from the appearance whether or not the game ball easily passes through the specific area 39. It will be difficult. As a result, the effect of the V-round and the presence / absence of V-passage (scheduled to pass V / non-pass) (for example, the round effect of V-round, the notification effect related to V-pass / non-pass, etc.) is not easily impaired. Become.

The specified number of large winning openings and the predetermined value that triggers the operation of the movable piece 150 are not limited to the number (value) shown in this embodiment. For example, the specified number of large winning openings may be "10", "8", or the like. Further, the first to third predetermined values that trigger the operation of the movable piece 150 are values that do not exceed the specified number of the large winning openings, and have a relationship of "first predetermined value <second predetermined value <third predetermined value". Any value that satisfies is sufficient. However, in the jackpot game related to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, V passage is less likely to occur (substantially does not occur), and in the jackpot game related to the V passing scheduled jackpot, V passing is likely to occur (substantially occurs). ), The first predetermined value is preferably "1" and the second predetermined value is preferably "2" or "3" from the viewpoint of not impairing the playability (specification) of the jackpot game. The 3 predetermined value is preferably a value such that the difference from the 2nd predetermined value is 3 or more, and particularly preferably the same number as the specified number of the large winning openings. When the third predetermined value is set to a value smaller (smaller) than the specified number of the large winning openings, the second operation of the movable piece 150 is performed before the end of the round, and the movable piece 150 is in the non-operating state (second distribution state). Will be.

Further, in this embodiment, the first to third predetermined values are fixed values, respectively, but one or both of the second predetermined value and the third predetermined value can be set according to, for example, the jackpot type (type of jackpot symbol). It may be a variable (different) value. For example, regarding the 7R 1st jackpot, the 15R 3rd jackpot, and the 15R 4th jackpot, which are the planned V-passing jackpots, the 2nd predetermined value C2 is set to "2", "3", and "4", respectively, and the 3rd predetermined value C3 is all. The second predetermined value C2 is set to "9", the third predetermined value C3 is set to "8", "6", and "5", respectively, and the second predetermined value C2 is set to "2" and "2", respectively. It is possible to set the third predetermined value C3 to "5", "6", and "8" as "3" and "4", respectively. In this case, the timing at which the movable piece 150 in the non-operating state becomes the operating state and the timing at which the movable piece 150 in the operating state becomes the non-operating state are varied, so that the timing at which V passage occurs during the V round can be determined. It is possible to change the V-passable period (the period during which the movable piece 150 is in the operating state). This makes it possible to diversify the game content (playability) of the V-round and improve the interest. Further, by increasing the number of jackpot types as compared with this embodiment and setting various relationships between the jackpot type and the second predetermined value and the third predetermined value, it is possible to make the jackpot more diverse.

Further, the opening pattern of the large winning opening is not limited to this embodiment, and the opening pattern may be different between the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35. Further, in this embodiment, the big winning opening opening pattern is the same except that the number of rounds differs depending on the type of big hit (7R or 15R), but the big winning opening opening pattern may be different depending on the type of big hit. .. Further, the operation pattern (first operation mode, second operation mode) of the movable piece 150 is not limited to this embodiment.

The distribution probability of each jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 45% for the 7R first jackpot, 50% for the 7R second jackpot, 5% for the 15R third jackpot, and V. When divided into a planned passing jackpot and a V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the V scheduled passing jackpot is 50% and the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is 50% (see FIGS. 6 and 8). On the other hand, the distribution probability of each big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 80% for the 15R 4th big hit and 20% for the 15R 5th big hit. When divided into the planned passing jackpots, the V scheduled passing jackpot is 80% and the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is 20% (see FIGS. 6 and 8).

For this reason, if a big hit is made in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 21, which is easy to enter due to the operation of the opening extension function (occurrence of a high base state) described later. , The possibility of a big hit scheduled to pass through V is higher than that of a big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first starting port 20. In addition, when the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is a big hit, the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is a big hit. Compared to the case where it becomes, the possibility of becoming a 15R jackpot is higher.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the second starting port is rather than a big hit in the hit / fail judgment (first special symbol hit / fail judgment, first judgment) performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 20. It is set so that a big hit in the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol hit / fail judgment, second judgment) performed when the game ball enters the 21 is more likely to be advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player plays the game in anticipation of entering the second starting port 21. This is particularly remarkable during the operation of the open extension function in which the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 increases.

In this embodiment, the determination of whether the jackpot is a big hit or a miss is performed based on a random number for determining whether the jackpot is correct or not (also referred to as “information for determining whether the jackpot is correct or not”), and the type of the jackpot in the case of a big hit is determined. It is performed based on a random number for determining a jackpot type (also referred to as a "random number for determining a symbol" or "information for determining a symbol"). As shown in FIG. 7A, the random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not takes a value in the range of "0 to 629", and the random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of "0 to 99".

In addition, the random numbers (acquisition information) acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 include a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, a random number for determining the jackpot type, and a variable pattern random number (acquisition information). There is also "variation pattern information"). The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of "0 to 198".

Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 include the normal symbol hit / miss determination random numbers shown in FIG. 7 (B). The random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (ordinary symbol lottery), and takes a value in the range of "0 to 240".

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of gaming states by a combination in which each function of the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the open extension function for the special symbol and the normal symbol is in the activated state or the non-operated state. Have. For special symbols, the state in which the probability fluctuation function is operating is called the "high probability state", and the state in which it is not operating is called the "normal state" or "low probability state". Further, the "low probability state (normal state)" is also referred to as a "first gaming state", and the "high probability state" is also referred to as a "second gaming state".

In the high probability state, the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol winning / failing determination (big hit probability, probability of deriving a specific result) is higher than in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the hit / fail judgment is made using the jackpot determination table for the normal state in which the jackpot probability is a predetermined probability (1/315 in this embodiment), and in the high probability state, the jackpot probability is higher than the predetermined probability. A hit / fail judgment is made using a jackpot judgment table for a high probability state, which has a high probability (1/63 in this embodiment) (see FIG. 8A). Therefore, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the specific display result is derived as the display result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol (probability that the stopped symbol becomes the jackpot symbol) compared to when it is not activated. Will be higher.

In addition, the state in which the variable time shortening function is operating for the special symbol is called the "time saving state", and the state in which it is not operating is called the "non-time saving state". In the time-saving state, the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the confirmation display) is shorter than the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time-saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table defined so that the fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 9). reference). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and effective entry into the starting port (entry that can be memorized as the special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with the smooth progress of the game. The function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be activated for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be activated for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for a special symbol may be operated at the same time, or only one of them may be operated. The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol operate in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening function for the special symbol. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the time saving state of the special symbol, and do not operate in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the hit probability in the normal symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the non-time-saving state.

Specifically, in the time saving state, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be a hit is larger than the normal symbol hit judgment table used in the non-time saving state. Judgment of a normal symbol) is performed (see FIG. 8 (C)). That is, when the probability fluctuation function for the normal symbol is activated, the probability that the display result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stop symbol will be the normal hit symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated.

Also, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 8D). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) is activated, and the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state. In addition, in the time saving state, the function of increasing the number of times the variable winning device 22 is opened is activated, and the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time saving state.

Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the non-time saving state, the opening / closing member 23 of the variable winning device 22 performs a short opening once to open the second starting port 21 for 0.2 seconds, and the time saving state. When the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is a hit, the opening / closing member 23 of the variable winning device 22 performs a long opening three times to open the second starting port 21 for 2.0 seconds.

In the situation where the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol, and the opening time extending function and the opening number of times increasing function of the variable winning device 22 are operating, those functions are not activated as compared with the case where these functions are not activated. Therefore, the second starting port 21 is frequently opened, and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes high (also referred to as “high frequency state”). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these functions are operating is also referred to as a "high base state" or "electric support state", and the state in which these functions are not operating is also referred to as a "low base state" or "non-electric support state". In the high base state (high frequency state), you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have.

It should be noted that the high base state does not have to operate all the above-mentioned functions. That is, as compared with the case where the function is not activated by the operation of at least one of the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol, and the opening time extending function and the opening number of times increasing function of the variable winning device 22. It suffices if the second starting port 21 is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high-base state can also be called a "high-base generation function".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the 7R first jackpot, the 15R third jackpot, or the 15R fourth jackpot is reached, the gaming state after the jackpot game is that the gaming ball passes through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. Since there is an extremely high possibility that the special symbol will be in a high probability state based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39, the special symbol will be in a time-saving state and a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is also called "high accuracy and high base state".

In the high-accuracy high-based state, the variation display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) without becoming a big hit, or the number of executions (variation count) of the variation display of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). ), It becomes a big hit and ends when the big hit game is executed (started). This high-accuracy high-base state is a so-called "probability-changing gaming state" for the player. If the game ball has not passed through the specific area 39, the special symbol is in a normal state, a time-saving state of the special symbol, and a high base state (low accuracy high base state).

Further, in the case of the 7R 2nd big hit or the 15R 5th big hit, the game state after the big hit game is very unlikely that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the big hit game, so that the special symbol is low. Along with the probability state (normal state), the special symbol becomes a time-saving state and a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is also referred to as a "low accuracy high base state".

In the low accuracy high base state, the variation display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) without becoming a big hit, or the number of executions (variation count) of the variation display of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). ), It becomes a big hit and ends when the big hit game is executed (started). This low accuracy and high base state is a so-called "time saving game state" for the player. Although the possibility is extremely low, in the big hit game related to the 7R 2nd big hit or the 15R 5th big hit, if the game ball passes through the specific area 39, it becomes a “high accuracy high base state”.

In addition, whether or not the probability fluctuation function is activated after the end of the big hit game, that is, in the case where the game state becomes the "high accuracy high base state" and the case where the game state becomes the "low accuracy high base state", that is, It is also possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the game state after the big hit game is a high-probability state or a low-probability state. Such a state in which it is difficult to determine whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state is also referred to as a “probability non-notification state”. In the probability non-notification state, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is in the high probability state through the appearance (appearance) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as an effect performed as the game progresses (substantially impossible). It is said that. This "probability non-notification state" can be generated until, for example, a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variation display of the special symbol, which is the end condition of the "low probability high base state", is performed.

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B by hitting right. In the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. Because it is. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which is a trigger for determining whether or not the symbol is correct, a right-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21. As a result, a larger number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct) can be obtained as compared with the case of hitting left. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be lit in a predetermined manner, and notifies that the game ball should be launched aiming at the right game area 3B (right-handed instruction notification). The high base state is also referred to as a "right-handed game state".

On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A by hitting the left side. In the low base state, the second starting port 21 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to enter the first starting port 20 than to enter the second starting port 21. Because it is. Therefore, a left-handed strike is performed to allow the game ball to enter the first starting port 20. As a result, a larger number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct) can be obtained as compared with the case of right-handed striking. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify that the game ball should be launched aiming at the left game area 3A (left-handed instruction notification). The low base state is also referred to as a "left-handed game state".

Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the launch direction by the display mode (lighting mode) of the LEDs. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify the left game area that both LEDs should be turned off, such as "y □ z □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify the right game area that both LEDs should be turned on, such as "y ■ z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can. Further, apart from the instruction notification by the launch direction display 47, a right-handed instruction image instructing the player to right-handed is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the big hit game or the high base state. .. Further, when the state shifts from the high base state to the low base state, a left-handed instruction image instructing the player to left-handed is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The sub-control board 90 and the image control board 100 (effect execution means) execute the control related to the display of these instruction images.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the "low probability low base state" in which the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function are not activated, this low probability low base state is referred to as "normal game". It can be regarded as a "state" or a "normal state", and a game in which a special symbol is variablely displayed in the state can be regarded as a "normal game". Then, a "low accuracy high base state" and a "high accuracy high base state" can be set as a gaming state (specific gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low accuracy low base state (normal gaming state).

In addition, the big hit game is a game that can be executed by changing the special symbol and displaying the big hit symbol in a stopped manner, and for the player, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained by entering the game ball into the big winning opening. Since it is an advantageous game that can be obtained, the big hit game can be regarded as a "special game", and the game state in which the big hit game is performed (big hit game state) can be regarded as a "special game state". ..

In addition, the low-accuracy low-base state (normal gaming state) and the low-accuracy high-base state (time-saving gaming state, electric support gaming state) are gaming states belonging to the "first gaming state", and the low-accuracy low-base state and low-accuracy low-accuracy state. The high-accuracy high-base state (probability-changing gaming state), which is more advantageous for the player than the high-base state, is a gaming state that belongs to the "second gaming state". However, since the low-accuracy high-base state is a gaming state that is more game-friendly for the player than the low-accuracy low-base state, the low-accuracy low-base state is regarded as a gaming state that belongs to the "first gaming state", and the low-accuracy high is low. The base state can also be regarded as a game state belonging to the "second game state". That is, the low base state may be referred to as the "first gaming state" and the high base state may be referred to as the "second gaming state".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to set three gaming states of "low probability low base state", "low probability high base state", and "high probability high base state". In addition to this, it may be possible to set a high probability state of the special symbol, a non-time saving state of the special symbol, and a low base state, that is, a “high probability low base state”.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the processing contents (control processing by the main control unit 80) of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 39. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the processing contents of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, the initial settings are first performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter reset. And so on. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are disabled (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by one addition. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, interrupts are enabled (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 ms. Then, between the end of the interrupt process (S105) and the start of the next interrupt process (S105), the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Will be executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt process (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt processing (S105), the output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. do. The output command or the like includes information on the game state, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, the symbol as the jackpot type (big hit symbol), the variation pattern, and the like. The command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. In this case, the upper 1 byte is information about the type of the command, and the lower 1 byte is information about the content of the command.

In the input processing (S202) performed after the output processing (S201), various sensors (first starting port sensor 20a, second starting port sensor 21a, first large winning opening sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the specific area sensor 39a, the non-specific area sensor 49, etc. (see FIG. 5) read the detection signal, and the detection signal is the sensor that triggers the payout of the prize ball. If, it is stored in the output buffer of the RAM as prize ball information. Further, the detection signal from the lower plate full detection sensor that detects the fullness of the lower plate 62 is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as the lower plate full data.

The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed after the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (S105) and the other period (after the end of the interrupt processing (S105)). It is performed both in the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started).

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), normal symbol operation process (S205), special symbol operation process (S206), and specific area sensor detection process (S207), which will be described later. , The start ball entry process (S209) and the power failure monitoring process (S210) are executed. After that, other processing (S211) not deeply related to the present invention is executed to end the interrupt processing (S105). Then, the processes S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (see FIG. 10), and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 ms). ), Interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
As shown in FIG. 12, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). .. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), proceed to S305, and if it has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of normal symbol hold balls (number of normal symbol hold balls, specifically Determines whether or not the value of the counter provided in the RAM for counting the number of reserved figures) is less than 4 (S302).

If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not less than 4 (NO in S302), proceed to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal symbol reserved balls is less than 4 (YES in S302), "1" is added to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7B) of the random number counter for normal symbol hit / miss determination stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number value (acquired information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of ordinary symbol reserved balls in the normal figure reserved storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a (S305). If the game ball has not entered the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of second special figure reserved, specifically, the RAM of the main control unit 80) is provided. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter that counts the number of the second special figure pending) is less than 4 (upper limit number) (S306). Then, if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not less than 4 (NO in S306), the process proceeds to S309, and if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than 4 (YES in S306), the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is reached. Add "1" to (S307).

Following the processing of S307, the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, which is stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, and the random number for determining the jackpot type. The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the random number values shown in FIG. 7 (A) are acquired), and the acquired random number values (acquisition) are acquired. Information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the second special figure 2 in the reserved storage unit of the second special figure.

Next, in S309, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 20, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a (S309). If the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 (NO in S309), the process is completed, and if the game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (YES in S309), the special figure 1 Whether or not the number of reserved balls (the number of the first special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the first special figure hold provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) is less than 4 (upper limit number). Is determined (S310). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not less than 4 (NO in S310), the process is completed, and when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than 4 (YES in S310), the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is reached. Add "1" to (S311).

Following the processing of S311, the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S312) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), the value of the special symbol hit / miss determination counter stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is the same as in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308). (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the disturbance shown in FIG. 7A). (Acquire numerical values), and store those acquired random numbers in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the first special figure in the reserved storage unit of the first special figure.

[Usu-zu operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal drawing operation process (S205) shown in FIG. 13 after the start port sensor detection process (S204). In the normal figure operation process (S205), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. .. Then, when the "normal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "2" (S401). NO, YES for S403), normal symbol change processing (S404) is performed, and if the "normal symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S401 and S403, YES for S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. Processing (S406) is performed, and if the "normal operation status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. The normal figure operation status is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 14, in the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and if it is "0" (YES in S501). , This process is completed without performing the processes of S502 to S505. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit / miss determination process described later is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the game state is a time-saving state, the normal symbol variation time is 1 second. Select a pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a non-time saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 30 seconds is selected.

Following the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed, and then the normal symbol variation start process (S505) is performed to complete the process. In the normal symbol variation start processing (S505), the variation display of the normal symbol is started based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol change start processing (S505), a normal symbol change start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of change of the normal symbol.

[Ordinary symbol hit / fail judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (that is, whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state) (S602). When it is determined in S602 that the time saving flag is ON, that is, it is in the time saving state (YES in S602), among the normal symbol hit judgment tables shown in FIG. 8 (C), the table for the time saving state (the hit judgment value is "". Based on the high-probability normal-figure hit / fail determination based on "0" to "239"), it is determined whether or not it is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values. On the other hand, when it is determined in S602 that the time reduction flag is not ON, that is, it is in the non-time reduction state (NO in S602), the table for the non-time reduction state (hit determination) among the normal symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8 (C). It is determined whether or not the value is a hit (S603) by the low-probability normal-figure hit / fail determination based on the values "0" and "1"), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / fail judgment (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and when it is determined that the result is not a hit (missing) (NO in S605). ), Determine the out-of-order normal symbol (out-of-normal symbol) to be stopped and displayed (S606), and finish the process. On the other hand, when it is determined in S605 that it is a hit (normal figure hit) (YES in S605), the normal symbol (normal figure hit symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the normal figure hit flag is turned ON (S60). S608), finish the process.

[Ordinary symbol random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each Fuzu hold in the Fuzu hold storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest hold storage in the normal figure hold storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth hold of the normal figure is cleared to zero (S703). , Finish the process. In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order of hold.

[Processing during normal symbol change]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if not (NO in S801), the processing is terminated as it is. .. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), and the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the variable display of the normal symbol at the display result (hit normal symbol or out-of-order normal symbol) according to the judgment result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not (S804), this process is performed. To finish.

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If the normal map hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal map operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S901), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON, that is, whether or not the time saving state is in effect (S902). Then, if it is in the time saving state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). As described above, the opening pattern in the time saving state is an opening pattern in which the opening for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, "3" is set in the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, if it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S902), the opening pattern in the non-time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S906). As described above, the opening pattern in the non-time saving state is an opening pattern in which opening for 0.2 seconds is performed once. Therefore, "1" is set in the second start port opening counter. Then, following the set of the open pattern (S903, S906), the normal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is completed.

[Ordinary electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal figure is ON (S1001). The normal-figure-hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second starting port 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game executed as a hit.

If the end flag per normal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (opening timing) (S1003), and if not (NO in S1003), the process is completed. If so, the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process is completed. On the other hand, if the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is time to close the second starting port 21 (closing timing) (that is, after opening the second starting port 21 in advance. Judging (whether or not the specified opening time has passed) (S1005), if not reached (NO in S1005), the processing is completed, and if it is reached (YES in S1005), the second starting port 21 is closed (NO). Closed) (S1006).

Following the closing process (S1006) of the second starting port 21, the value of the second starting port opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the second starting port opening counter is "0". (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is finished as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S1008), the end processing for hitting the normal figure to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), the end flag for hitting the normal figure is set (S1010), and this process is finished. The second start port opening counter becomes "0" when the second start port 21 is opened three times (opening operation of the opening / closing member 23) in the non-time reduction state, and is set to "0" in the non-time reduction state. When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S1001), the opening of the second starting port 21 (auxiliary game) of the number of times set in S903 or S906 is completed. Therefore, the end flag for the normal figure is turned off (S1011), the flag for the normal figure is turned off (S1012), the operation status of the normal figure is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal figure operation process (S205) (see FIGS. 11 and 13).

[Special figure operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure operation process (S206) after the normal figure operation process (S205). In the special symbol operation process (S206), as shown in FIG. 20, a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b) and a large prize device (first large prize device 31 and first). The processing related to the two major winning devices 36) is divided into four stages, and "special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. Then, when the special symbol operation status is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the special symbol operation status is "2" (NO in S1101, S1103). In (YES), special symbol change processing (S1104) is performed, and if the special symbol operation status is "3" (NO for both S1101 and S1103, YES for S1105), special symbol confirmation processing (S1106) is performed. , If the special figure operation status is "4" (NO for S1101, S1103, and S1105), special electric accessory processing (S1107) as a big hit game is performed. The special figure operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 2) is “0” (S1201). .. Special figure 2 When the number of reserved balls is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, when the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the second starting port 21 is not stored, the first start is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in FIG. 1) is “0” (S1206). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, when the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the first starting port 20 is not stored, the image is displayed. It is determined whether or not the display screen 7a of the display device 7 is being processed as a standby screen (during the execution of the demo screen for waiting for customers) (S1211), and if it is being processed (YES in S1211), the book is as it is. If the process is completed and the process is not in progress (NO in S1211), the standby screen setting process is executed to display the standby screen (S1212).

When it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls is not "0" (NO in S1201), that is, there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the second starting port 21. In this case, the special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1203), the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205), which will be described later, are performed in this order. ..

Further, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201 and NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second starting port 21. Although there is no memory, if there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the first starting port 20, the special figure 1 hit / miss determination process (S1207) and the special figure 1 fluctuation described later will be described. The pattern selection process (S1208), the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order.

As described above, in this embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special figure hold is performed only when the second special figure hold is "0" (when YES in S1201). That is, the digestion of the second special symbol hold (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special symbol hold (variable display of the first special symbol). And in this embodiment, the hit / fail judgment based on the second special figure hold is more likely to be a big hit with a large profit for the player than the hit / fail judgment based on the first special figure hold (FIG. 8 (FIG. 8). B)).

[Special Figure 2 Win / Fail Judgment Process]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure 2 hit / miss determination process (S1202), first, as a determination value, the lowest area of the second special figure hold storage unit of the RAM (that is, the first one of the second special figure hold is supported). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the oldest stored) stored in the RAM area) is read (S1301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in a high probability state (S1302). Then, if it is not in the high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if it is in the normal state, the jackpot determination table for the normal state (the jackpot determination value is "3" and "" in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A)). A pass / fail judgment is made based on 397 ") (S1303). On the other hand, if it is in the high probability state (YES in S1302), the hit / fail judgment is performed based on the big hit determination table for the high probability state in the big hit determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) (S1304). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

Next, in S1305, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination (S1303, S1304) is a "big hit" (S1305). As a result, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (YES in S1305), the value (label-TRND-AS) of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type is read out, and the jackpot is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8 (B). The type is determined (S1307), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1308), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1309), and the process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the hit / fail judgment (S1303, S1304) is not "big hit" ("missing") (NO in S1305), the losing symbol is determined (S1306), and the process is completed. The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the hit / fail determination (S1303, S1304) related to the second special symbol functions as a “second hit / fail determination means”.

Here, in determining the jackpot type, in the case of the hit / fail determination related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and the hit / fail determination related to the second special symbol is made. In that case, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol. It should be noted that the special symbol winning / failing determination and the jackpot type determination determination may be referred to as "judgment", respectively, or may be referred to as "judgment" including which jackpot symbol is obtained by performing the jackpot determination.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203) after the special figure 2 hit / miss determination process (S1202). As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state (whether or not the time saving flag is ON) (S1401). .. If it is determined in S1401 that it is not in the time saving state (NO in S1401), that is, if it is in the non-time saving state, then it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1402).

When it is determined in S1402 that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1402), refer to the non-time saving state jackpot table (the part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, which corresponds to the non-time saving state and jackpot). Fluctuation pattern A variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1403). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 is selected. In this embodiment, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Then, the process proceeds to S1404.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1402 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1402), it is determined whether the number of reserved second special symbols is either "1" or "2" (S1405). Since the number of holdings referred to here is the number of storages including the information for which the fluctuation pattern is determined by this processing, the number of holdingss is set to any value of "1" to "4".

Then, when it is determined in S1405 that the number of holds is either "1" or "2" (YES in S1405), the first hold number loss table (variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 is in a non-time saving state). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the part corresponding to the number of reserved balls "1, 2") (S1406). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P4 to P7 is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1405 that the number of holds is neither "1" nor "2", that is, it is either "3" or "4" (NO in S1405), the table for removing the second hold number (NO). In the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, the fluctuation pattern is based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the non-time saving state, the deviation, and the portion corresponding to the number of reserved balls "3, 4"). Select (S1407). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P8 to P11 is selected. Further, the first reserved number out-of-number table is set with a higher possibility of selecting a fluctuation pattern of a relatively long fluctuation time than the second reserved number out-of-number table. Further, the shortest variable time (12000 ms) that can be selected is also set to be longer than that of the table for the second hold number deviation (4000 ms).

Further, when it is determined in S1401 that the time is shortened (YES in S1401), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1408). As a result, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1408), the variation pattern is referred to in the time-saving state jackpot table (the part of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to the time-saving state and the jackpot). The variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1409). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P12 to P14 is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1408 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1408), it is determined whether or not the number of hold is "1" (S1410). The number of holdings referred to here is the same as described above, and the number of holdings is set to any value of "1" to "4".

When it is determined in S1410 that the number of holdings is "1" (YES in S1410), the third holding number out-of-order table (in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to (corresponding part) (S1411). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P15 to P18 is selected.

Further, when it is determined in S1410 that the number of holds is not "1", that is, the number of holds is any one of "2" to "4" (NO in S1410), the table for removing the number of holds 4 (Fig.) The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the fluctuation pattern table shown in 9 which is in a time-saving state, is out of alignment, and corresponds to the number of reserved balls "2 to 4"). (S1412). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P19 to P22 is selected.

Here, the fluctuation pattern selected when the result of the hit / fail judgment in the time-saving state is wrong is shorter than the fluctuation pattern selected when the result of the hit / fail judgment in the non-time-saving state is wrong. Is more likely to be selected. This is because the digestion speed of the special figure hold is accelerated (the game during the time reduction is rapidly advanced) by allowing more fluctuation patterns with a short fluctuation time to be selected in the time reduction state.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, another process shown in FIG. 23 is performed (S1404), and the process is completed. In other processing (S1404), processing such as setting a fluctuation pattern specification command according to the selected fluctuation pattern in the output buffer of the RAM is performed. The variation pattern specification command set in this process is included in the variation start command described later, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 25, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, when the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit is one lower side (for example, when the second special figure reservation storage unit consists of the address space corresponding to the addresses "0000" to "0003", the address. Shift to the "0000" side) (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit, that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth piece of the second special figure reservation (when stored up to the upper limit number). Is cleared to zero (S1503) to finish this process.

After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) is executed as shown in FIG. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started.

Next, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" and the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201 and NO in S1206). , Special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1207), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Fail Judgment Process]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1207), the process (S1601 to S1609) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. 22. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to the special figure 1, in the S1601, it is stored in the lowestmost area of the first special figure hold storage unit of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first item of the first special figure hold). The random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is read out and processed. The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the hit / fail determination (S1603, S1604) related to the first special symbol functions as the “first hit / fail determination means”.

In addition, it also refers to either one or both of the first hit / fail determination means and the above-mentioned second hit / fail determination means, and is also referred to as a “hit / fail determination means” or a “judgment means”.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208), processing (S1701 to S1712) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) shown in FIGS. 23 and 24. )I do. Therefore, a detailed explanation of this process is omitted.

[Special Figure 1 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit is shifted to the lower side by one (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit, that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth piece of the first special figure reservation (when stored up to the upper limit number). Is cleared to zero (S1803) to finish this process.

After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) of FIG. 21 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the special symbol variation processing (S1104), first, has the variation time of the special symbol (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208; see FIG. 9) elapsed? Judge whether or not (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the process ends. As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is continued.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), the fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON (S1903), if it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability change counter is subtracted by 1 (S1904), and whether or not the value of the probability change counter is "0". Is determined (S1905). When it is determined that the probability change counter is "0" (YES in S1905), the probability change flag is turned off (S1906), and the process proceeds to S1907. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S1903) and when it is determined that the probability variation counter is not "0" (NO in S1905), the process proceeds to S1907 as it is.

In S1907, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1907). Then, when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the value of the time saving counter for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol executed during the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (S1908), and the value of the time saving counter is changed. It is determined whether or not it is "0" (S1909). If the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (YES in S1909), the time reduction flag is turned off (S1910), and the process proceeds to S1911. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S1907) and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911 as it is.

In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbol at the result corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol hit / fail determination random number and the big hit type determination random number is performed (S1912), and this processing is completed.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 31, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot this time is a 15R jackpot (S2002). As a result, when it is determined that the jackpot is 15R (YES in S2002), "15" is set in the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2006. .. On the other hand, if it is determined that the type of the jackpot this time is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S2002), the jackpot type is a 7R jackpot, so set "7" to the value of the round counter (S2005) and move to the processing of S2006. do.

In S2006, lighting pattern data that determines the display mode (lighting mode) of the round display 45 is set (S2006), and the process proceeds to S2007. Specifically, the lighting pattern data of the two LEDs (7R lamp, 15R lamp) constituting the round display 45 according to the above-mentioned determination result of S2002, that is, the type (number of rounds) of the big hit this time. Is set (S2006). When the set lighting pattern data is output by the output process (S201), the LED (round lamp) of the round display 45 is lit according to the lighting pattern data.

Next, in S2007, the determination type flag is set (S2007). The determination type flag indicates whether the special symbol hit / fail judgment that triggered the big hit this time is the first special symbol hit / miss judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. That is, it is a flag that makes it possible to specify whether the first special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit or the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit. In this embodiment, as the judgment type flags, the first judgment flag indicating that the special symbol hit / fail judgment that triggered the big hit this time is the first special symbol hit / miss judgment, and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. Two flags, a second determination flag and a second determination flag, are provided.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes "7R jackpot" (7R first and second jackpots) and "15R jackpot" (15R third to fifth jackpots) as jackpots. Of these, the 7R 1st and 2nd big hits and the 15R 3rd big hit are the big hit types when the 1st special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, and the 15R 4th and 5th big hits are the 2nd special symbol hit / miss judgment. This is the type of big hit when it becomes a big hit (see FIG. 6).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the determination type flag is set based on the current jackpot type (S2007). That is, when the type of the big hit this time is any of 7R 1st big hit, 7R 2nd big hit, and 15R 3rd big hit, this big hit is based on the 1st special symbol hit / fail judgment (also referred to as "special figure 1 big hit"). .) Therefore, the first determination flag is turned ON (S2007). On the other hand, when the type of the jackpot this time is the 15R 4th jackpot or the 15R 5th jackpot, the jackpot this time is based on the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (also referred to as "special figure 2 jackpot"), so the second jackpot. Turn on the judgment flag (S2007). The determination type flag is turned off (initialized) when the big hit game (special game state) related to the current big hit ends.

Next, in S2008, a big winning opening opening pattern according to the type (type) of the big hit is set (S2008), and the process shifts to S2009. Here, as described above, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is determined according to the type of big hit (see FIG. 6). Specifically, if it is either the 7R 1st or 2nd jackpot, an opening pattern for the 7R jackpot corresponding to each jackpot is set, and if it is any of the 15R 3rd to 5th jackpots, each Set the opening pattern for the 15R jackpot corresponding to the jackpot. Then, the corresponding jackpot opening pattern is executed in each jackpot game.

In S2009, the movable piece operation timing is set according to the type of jackpot, and the process shifts to S2010. Here, as described above, the operation of the movable piece 150 in the V round (7th round in this embodiment) is performed based on the number of game balls entered into the second large winning opening 35 (V attacker). The number of balls that trigger the operation is determined according to the type of jackpot (see FIG. 49). Specifically, the first predetermined value C1, the second predetermined value C2, and the third predetermined value C3, which are predetermined according to the type of jackpot, are set (predetermined value setting means). The operation control of the movable piece 150 is performed based on the value set in this S2009 and the counting value (the number of balls entering the V attacker) by the ball entry counting means in the V round (7th round). Become. The second predetermined value C2 and the third predetermined value C3 are not set when the type of jackpot is "V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and are set only when the jackpot type is "V passing scheduled jackpot".

Next, in S2010, a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (S2010). Opening commands are provided according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, each jackpot such as 7R 1st jackpot opening command, 7R 2nd jackpot opening command, 15R 3rd jackpot opening command, 15R 4th jackpot opening command, and 15R 5th jackpot opening command. It is provided in response to each.

The opening command set in S2010 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output process (S201). The sub-control unit 90 that has received the opening command performs a process related to the execution of a predetermined game effect (for example, the opening effect) corresponding to the opening period.

Then, in S2111, the opening period corresponding to the opening command set in S2010 is started (S2111). The opening period is the period from the stop display (confirmed display) of the jackpot symbol to the start of the first round of the jackpot game.

Next, in S2012, the special figure operation status is set to "4" (S2012), and the process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in the above-mentioned S2001 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S2001), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2013), and the process ends as it is.

[Special electric accessory processing (big hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special electric accessory processing (S1108), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S2101), and when it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2101). The probability change flag is turned off (S2102), and then it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2103). When it is determined in S2103 that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S2103), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105. If NO is determined in S2101, the process proceeds to S2103 without turning off the probability change flag, and if NO is determined in S2103, the process proceeds to S2105 without turning off the time saving flag. That is, during the execution of the big hit game, it is controlled to a low probability state and a non-time saving state. In this embodiment, since the low base state is always in the non-time saving state, the low base state is also controlled during the execution of the big hit game.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening processes of the jackpot winning devices (first jackpot winning device 31 and second jackpot winning device 36) have been completed (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game. That is, it is a flag indicating that all the rounds constituting the jackpot game have been completed. This jackpot end flag is turned on in S2121, which will be described later.

When it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), then it is determined whether or not it is the start time of the round (S2106). This is determined based on the big winning opening opening pattern set for each big hit type described above. For example, if it is before the start of the first round, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the opening period ends and the first opening process of the first round is executed. Further, if it is after the first round has already started, it is determined whether or not the previous round is completed and the large winning opening closing process described later is completed.

If it is determined by S2106 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2106), the round start command of the corresponding round is set (S2107), the large winning opening opening process is performed (S2108), and the process is completed. As a result, the big winning opening will be opened and the predetermined round will start. In S2107, a round start command that can specify the round to start (start round), such as "1R start command" for the start of the first round and "2R start command" for the start of the second round. Is set. The set round start command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the output processing of S201. Further, in the big winning opening opening process of S2108, the big winning opening opening pattern determined according to the type of the big hit to be executed is started, and the opening pattern defined in the round to be started is started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2106 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2106), the process proceeds to S2111. Here, examples of determining that it is not the start time of the round include, for example, during the opening period before the start of one round, during the execution of the round (during the round game), during the interval period after the end of the round, and the like.

In S2111, it is determined whether or not the round is being executed, that is, whether or not the large winning opening is open based on the predetermined opening pattern started in S2108 (S2111). As a result, when it is determined that the round is being executed (the big winning opening is open) (YES in S2111), then it is determined whether or not the executing round is a V round (S2112). As described above, since the 7th round of the big hit game is the V round in this embodiment, it is determined here whether or not it is the 7th round. Then, if the running round is a V round (7th round) (YES in S2112), the V round processing described later is performed (S2113), and if it is not a V round (if it is a round other than the 7th round). , The process shifts to the processing of S2114 without performing the V-round processing (S2113).

In S2114, it is determined whether or not the round end condition of the running round is satisfied (S2114). Here, as the round end condition of this embodiment, (1) the round execution time (“25 seconds” in this embodiment) specified for the running round has elapsed (or is set for the running round). The opening pattern has been completed), and (2) the specified number of game balls (“9” in this embodiment) specified in the running round have been entered in the running round. The conditions are set. Then, when either of the conditions is satisfied, the round end condition is satisfied based on the condition that is satisfied earlier. During the big hit game, as long as the game ball is normally launched (right-handed) and flows down the game area 3 (right game area 3B) without delay, the condition (2) is usually satisfied as the round end condition. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2114 that the round end condition is not satisfied (NO in S2114), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied in S2114 (YES in S2114), the round end command of the corresponding round is set (S2115), and the process proceeds to S2116. In S2115, a round end command that can specify the end round (end round) is set, such as "1R end command" if the first round ends and "2R end command" if the second round ends. Will be done. The set round end command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the output processing of S201.

In S2116, the large winning opening closing process described later is performed, and then it is determined whether or not the large winning opening closing process is completed (S2117). As will be described in detail later, in the large winning opening closing process (S2116), mainly the closing processing of the large winning opening (1st major winning opening 30 or the 2nd major winning opening 35) and the interval period setting process accompanying the end of the round are performed. , A comparison determination process between the number of balls entered into the V attacker and the number of ejected balls in the V round, a retry process based on the result of the comparison determination, an error process, and the like are executed. When these processes are completed, it is determined that the large winning opening closing process is completed (completed) in S2117 (YES in S2117). The closing processing flag described later is turned on during the execution of the large winning opening closing process, and the closing processing flag is turned off when the large winning opening closing process is completed (completed). Therefore, the determination of S2117 is performed based on the ON / OFF of the closing processing flag. In addition, each of the interval period setting process, the comparison judgment process, the retry process, and the error process, which can be executed in the large winning opening closing process, is also referred to as "confirmation process" individually, and these processes are also collectively referred to as confirmation process.

If it is determined in S2117 that the large winning opening closing process has not been completed (the closing process flag is ON) (NO in S2117), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2117 that the large winning opening closing process is completed (the closing process flag is OFF) (YES in S2117), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2118), and the value of the round counter is ". It is determined whether or not it is "0" (S2119). Then, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2119), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2119), the jackpot end processing is performed (S2120), then the jackpot end flag is turned ON (S2121), and the processing is completed. The value of the round counter becomes "0" when all the rounds in the big hit to be executed are completed.

In the jackpot end processing in S2120, the jackpot ending command is set and the jackpot ending period is started. The ending command is selected and set from a plurality of ending commands based on the game state at the time of a big hit, the type information of the big hit, and ON / OFF of the V flag. The ending period to be executed (set) differs depending on the type of ending command to be set.

For example, the ending period (ending time) set (set) at the end of the jackpot game related to the first special symbol is 10 seconds, and the ending period (ending) set (set) at the end of the jackpot game related to the second special symbol. The time) can be different depending on the type of special symbol, such as 5 seconds. This is because the second special symbol is mainly displayed in a high base state (right-handed game state), and is a game state aiming at the next big hit (so-called "renso") following the so-called first hit, so the first This is because by shortening the ending time related to the second special symbol than the ending time related to the special symbol, the game in the high base state can be progressed speedily (smoothly). Alternatively, the ending period (ending time) set (set) at the end of the jackpot game related to the V-passing scheduled jackpot is 2 seconds, and the ending period (set) set at the end of the jackpot game related to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (set). The ending time) can be different depending on the type of jackpot, such as 10 seconds. In principle, after the jackpot game related to the jackpot scheduled to pass through V is completed, the game will be in a high-accuracy high-base state (high-probability state). Because it can be advanced to. The ending period (ending time) can be the same regardless of the type of special symbol, big hit, or the like.

Here, the ending period is after all the opening operations of the big winning openings (1st big winning opening 30 and the 2nd big winning opening 35) in the big hit game are completed, and the variation display of the special symbol (directed symbol) is completed. It is a period set before making it feasible, and is also called an "end period". During the ending period (end period), the big prize opening will be closed. The effect performed during this "end period" is also called "end effect (ending effect)". In addition, the opening period is a period set before the opening operation of the first (first round) of the big winning opening in the big hit game is started, and after the variable display of the special symbol (staging symbol) is disabled. Yes, it is also called the "start period". In addition, the effect performed during this "start period" is also referred to as "start effect (opening effect)".

In the above-mentioned S2105, when it is determined that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2105), since the final round in the jackpot game has ended, whether or not the execution time (ending time) of the jackpot ending effect has elapsed. (S2122), and if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2122), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2122), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2123), and the game state setting process (S2124) described later is performed.

Next, in S2125, the jackpot flag is turned off (S2125), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2126), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol standby processing (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation processing (S206).

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the above special electric accessory processing (S1108) functions as a “special game execution means”.

[V round processing]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the V round processing (S2113), first, whether or not the movable piece 150 provided in the V attacker (second large winning opening 35) is in the inactive state (second distribution state). Is determined (S2701). As a result, if it is determined that it is in the operating state (first distribution state) (NO in S2701), it shifts to the processing of S2709 described later, and if it is determined that it is in the non-operating state (YES in S2701), it is a V round. The number of game balls entered into the V-attacker inside, that is, the counting value by the above-mentioned entry number counting means is determined (S2702).

As described above, in the V round, the movable piece 150 operates based on the number of balls entered into the V attacker, and a predetermined value (first predetermined value) that determines the number of balls entered to trigger the operation. The values C1 to the third predetermined value C3. See FIG. 49) are set in S2009 described above.

In S2702, it is determined whether or not the counting value by the ball entry counting means in this V round is the first predetermined value C1 set in S2009 (S2702). In this embodiment, since the first predetermined value C1 is set to "1", in S2702, it is determined whether or not the counting value by the ball entry counting means is "1". As a result, if the count value (the number of balls entered into the V attacker) is "1" (YES in S2702), the processing of S2703 and S2704 is performed, and if it is not "1" (NO in S2702), S2703 and S2704 are performed. Move to the processing of S2705 without performing the processing of.

In S2703, the first operation of the movable piece 150 is performed (S2703). As a result, the movable piece 150 that was in the non-operating state (second distribution state) becomes the operating state (first distribution state). The first operation at this time is a short-time first operation based on the short opening pattern (first operation mode).

Next, in S2704, the specific area validity period is started (set) (S2704). The specific area valid period (also referred to as “V valid period”) is a period during which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a (passage of the game ball to the specific area 39) is valid, and the movable piece 150 has the movable piece 150. It is started (set) as it operates (becomes an operating state). On the contrary, the period other than the specific area valid period is a period during which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalidated (also referred to as “specific area invalid period” or “V invalid period”). When the movable piece 150 is in the non-operating state, the specific area invalid period (outside the specific area valid period) is set, and when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the invalid period, the detection is invalidated and the specific area is invalidated. It is determined that "specific area abnormal passage (specific area error)", which is a kind of error related to the passage of the game ball to 39, has occurred (error determination means).

Here, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a and the V flag is turned ON (that is, the specific area sensor 39a detects the game ball during the V valid period), the game state display 46 is displayed. By using a predetermined display mode, it is possible to notify that the gaming state after the end of the big hit game will be a high probability state. Specifically, for example, the game state display 46 composed of three LEDs of "a1a2a3" is "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" (for example, □: off, ■ in a normal state (low probability state). : Lighting) display mode is the display mode of "a1 ■ a2 ■ a3 ■" at the timing when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the big hit game and the V flag is turned ON. Then, when the big hit game is completed and the game state is set to the high probability state, the display mode is "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □". The lighting control timing of the game status display 46 is not limited to such timing, and even if the game ball passes through a specific area during the big hit game, the display mode of "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" remains. , "A1 ■ a2 ■ a3 ■" may be set at the timing of transitioning to the high-probability state after the end of the big hit game, and "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" may be displayed at the timing of transitioning from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. ..

When the V flag is ON, the probability change flag is ON. That is, the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (see S2124 described later). Then, in the specific area sensor detection process (S207) described later, the V flag is turned on only when V passage is detected during the specific area valid period, and V passage is detected outside the specific area valid period (during the V invalid period). If so, the V flag is not turned on. By doing so, the V flag is not turned on based on the passage of V due to fraudulent activity, that is, the V flag is not illegally set to the high probability state.

Next, in S2705, it is determined whether or not the V round (big hit game) being executed is related to the big hit scheduled to pass through V (S2705). In the case of a big hit scheduled to pass through V, after the first operation (short opening pattern) of the movable piece 150 is performed during the V round, it can be operated based on the subsequent entry of the game ball into the V attacker. ing. Therefore, in S2705, it is determined whether or not the V round being executed is related to the jackpot scheduled to pass V, and if it is determined that the jackpot is not scheduled to pass V (NO in S2705), that is, the V round being executed is If it is related to a jackpot scheduled to pass through V, this process is completed without performing the processes of S2705 to S2708.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the V round being executed is related to the jackpot scheduled to pass through V (YES in S2705), the number of game balls entered into the V attacker (counted value by the number of entered ball counting means) is determined. (S2706). Here, it is determined whether or not the counting value by the ball entry counting means in the V round is the second predetermined value C2 set in S2009 (S2706). Since the second predetermined value C2 is set to "2" in this embodiment (see FIG. 49), in S2706, it is determined whether or not the counting value by the ball entry counting means is "2". As a result, if the count value (the number of balls entered into the V attacker) is "2" (YES in S2706), the processing of S2707 and S2708 is performed, and if it is not "2" (NO in S2706), S2707 and S2708 This process is completed without performing the process of.

The processing of S2707 and S2708 is performed in the same manner as the processing of S2703 and S2704 described above. That is, the first operation of the movable piece 150 is performed as the first operation for a long time based on the long opening pattern (second operation mode) (S2707), and the specific region valid period starts with the first operation for a long time (S2707). (Set) (S2708).

The above is the process for changing the movable piece 150 in the non-operating state to the operating state. On the other hand, when it is determined in the above-mentioned S2701 that the movable piece 150 is not in the non-operating state (NO in S2701), that is, when it is determined that the movable piece 150 is in the operating state, the operating time of the movable piece 150 is Determine if it has passed (S2709).

As described above, when the counting value by the ball entry counting means becomes the first predetermined value C1 (“1” in this example) and the first operation of the movable piece 150 is executed (YES in S2702, S2703). After that, when the first operation time (“80 ms” in this example) elapses, the second operation of the movable piece 150 is executed. On the other hand, when the counting value by the ball entry number counting means becomes the second predetermined value C2 (“2” in this example) and the first operation of the movable piece 150 is executed (YES in S2706, S2707), then the entry is made. If the second operation time (“23000 ms” in this example) elapses before the count value by the ball number counting means reaches the third predetermined value C3 (“9” in this example), the second operation of the movable piece 150 is executed. To. Therefore, in S2709, the operating state of the movable piece 150 is due to the first operation based on the fact that the counting value by the ball entry number counting means becomes the first predetermined value C1 (the first ball entry into the V attacker). If so, it is determined whether or not the first operating time has elapsed as the operating time of the movable piece 150, and the counting value by the ball entry counting means becomes the second predetermined value C2 (two to the V attacker). If it is due to the second operation based on the eye entry), it is determined whether or not the second operation time has elapsed as the operation time of the movable piece 150.

The determination of whether the operation is the first operation or the second operation is determined, for example, when the first operation of the movable piece 150 is executed (S2703, S2707), the operation trigger is the first predetermined value C1 (1). It can be done by setting (ON) a flag indicating whether it is the second predetermined value C2 (second entry) or by referring to the flag.

When it is determined in S2709 that the operating time of the movable piece 150 has elapsed (YES in S2709), the second operation of the movable piece 150 is performed (S2710). As a result, the movable piece 150 that was in the operating state (first distribution state) becomes the non-operating state (second distribution state).

Next, in S2711, a predetermined measurement time (predetermined time) is set in the specific area validity period end timer, and the time measurement by the timer is started (S2711). In this embodiment, the end of the specific region valid period started in the above-mentioned S2704 and S2708 is set as the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the operation of the movable piece 150 is completed. That is, the period from the start of operation of the movable piece 150 in the V round to the lapse of a predetermined time (1.5 seconds in this example) after the end of the operation is defined as the specific area valid period (V valid period). In S2711, a predetermined time that determines the end of the specific area validity period is set as the measurement time. In this way, the reason why the specific area valid period is continued even after the operation of the movable piece 150 is completed is that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 and the game ball is detected by the specific area 39a just before the end of the operation of the movable piece 150. In this case, the detection is treated as valid.

Of the specific area validity period, the period after the operation of the movable piece 150 is completed (1.5 seconds in this example) is also referred to as a "special validity period". After this special validity period has elapsed, the V invalid period will be reached. Further, during the execution period of the retry process of the movable piece 150, which will be described later, although the movable piece 150 operates, the V valid period is not set, and the V invalid period is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2709 that the operating time of the movable piece 150 has not elapsed (NO in S2709), it is determined whether or not the running V round (big hit game) is related to the big hit scheduled to pass through V. (S2712). As a result, when it is determined that the jackpot is not scheduled to pass through V (it is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V) (NO in S2712), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is scheduled to pass through V (YES in S2712), the number of game balls entered into the V attacker (counted value by the number of entered ball counting means) is determined (S2713). Here, it is determined whether or not the counting value by the ball entry counting means in the V round is the third predetermined value C3 set in S2009 (S2713). In this embodiment, since the third predetermined value C3 is set to "9" (see FIG. 49), in S2713, it is determined whether or not the counting value by the ball entry counting means is "9". As a result, if the count value (the number of balls entered into the V attacker) is not "9" (NO in S2713), this processing is finished as it is, and if it is "9", the above-mentioned processing of S2710 and S2711 is performed. This process is completed.

Here, as described above, in the V round related to the jackpot scheduled to pass through V, the movable piece 150 that has been activated by the second first operation (first operation for a long time) is inactive. It is usually based on the fact that the ninth ball entering the attacker is detected (the counting value by the ball entry number detecting means becomes the third predetermined value C3). Therefore, it is rare that it is determined that the operation time has elapsed in S2709 after the movable piece 150 performs the second first operation in the V round related to the V-passing jackpot, and in most cases, S2713. It is determined that the number of balls entered into the V attacker (counted value by the number of balls entered detection means) is the third predetermined value C3, and the movable piece 150 is in an inactive state. In this embodiment, since the third predetermined value C3, which is the trigger for the movable piece 150 to be inactive, is set to "9", which is the same number as the specified number of V attackers, the movable piece 150 is set to the end of the V round. It becomes inactive. Therefore, the V round will not be completed until the condition that the movable piece 150 that has been activated by the second first operation is changed to the non-operated state is satisfied. In other words, after the movable piece 150 performs the second first operation in the V round to enter the operating state (first distribution state), the operating state is maintained until the V round is completed. ..

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the operation control of the movable piece 150 by the above V-round processing (S2113) functions as a “distribution operation control means”. Further, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the processing of S2708 and S2711 in the V-round processing (S2113) functions as a “valid period setting means”.

[Large winning opening closure process]
As shown in FIG. 34, in the large winning opening closing process (S2116), first, it is determined whether or not the closing process flag is ON (S2801). The closing process flag is a flag indicating the execution status of the large winning opening closing process, and indicates that the large winning opening closing process is being executed as ON and that it is not being executed as OFF.

When it is determined in S2801 that the closure processing flag is ON (YES in S2801), the process shifts to the processing of S2804 described later, and when it is determined that the closure processing flag is not ON (OFF) (NO in S2801). Turn on the closure processing flag (S2802) and start the interval period (S2803). In S2803, the interval time (500 ms or 2000 ms) after the end of the round is set and the measurement of the time is started. The interval time (interval period) is set according to the ending round (non-V round or V round).

Next, in S2804, it is determined whether or not the round ended by satisfying the previous round end condition (YES in S2114) is a V round (S2804). As a result, when it is the V round that has ended (YES in S2804), the comparison judgment processing (S2805) described later is performed to shift to the processing of S2806, and it is not the V round (non-V round) that has ended. In the case (NO in S2804), the process shifts to the processing of S2806 without performing the comparison judgment processing (S2805).

Here, in the V round, when the movable piece 150 for opening and closing the specific area 39 in the V attacker is operated, the game ball may bite into the movable piece 150 and the game ball may be clogged in the attacker. .. Therefore, the number of balls entered and the number of balls ejected by the V attacker are compared (managed) by the comparison determination process (S2805) described later, and it is confirmed whether or not the ball is clogged. In addition, when V passage (game ball detection by the specific area detection switch 39a) is intentionally generated (erroneous detection) due to fraudulent acts such as thread suspension and radio wave goto, the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls match. Since there are cases where the ball is not entered, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity by comparing the number of balls entered and the number of discharged balls, and prevent unexpected damage from occurring.

Next, in S2805, it is determined whether or not the interval period has ended (interval time has elapsed) (S2805). As a result, when it is determined that the interval period has not ended, that is, when it is determined that the interval time is being measured (NO in S2805), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the interval period has ended (YES in S2804), the closing processing flag is turned OFF (S2807), and this processing ends.

[Comparison judgment processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the comparison determination process (S2805), first, the number of game balls (number of balls entered) that entered the V attacker (second major winning opening 35) in the V round and the number of game balls ejected from the V attacker. It is compared and judged with the number of game balls (number of ejected) played (S2901). In this comparison determination, the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls are compared to determine whether or not they match.

Here, as described above, the game ball that has entered the V attacker in the V round is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 35a, and the detected number (number of balls entered) is counted by the number of balls entered counting means. .. Further, the game ball detected by the second large winning opening sensor 35a is subsequently detected by the specific area sensor 39a or the non-specific area sensor 49a (passes through the specific area 39 or the non-specific area 49), and the number of detections (passing through the specific area 39 or the non-specific area 49). The number of emissions) is counted by the emission number counting means.

In S2901, the counting value (number of balls entered) by the ball entry counting means and the counting value (discharged number) by the ejection number counting means are compared and determined. That is, based on the detection results of the second large winning opening sensor 35a (ball entry detection means), the specific area sensor 39a (first pass detection means), and the non-specific area sensor 49a (second pass detection means), the V attacker The number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls are compared and judged. The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the processing of the S2901 functions as a “comparison determination means”.

Next, in S2902, as a result of the comparison determination in S2901, it is determined whether or not the number of balls entered into the V attacker and the number of ejected balls in the V round match (S2902). As a result, if the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls match (YES in S2902), this process is completed without performing the process after S2903. When the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls match, it can be determined that the entry and exit of the game ball to the V attacker is normally performed, so that this process is completed without performing the process after S2903.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2902 that the number of balls entered into the V attacker and the number of ejected balls do not match (mismatch) (NO in S2902), it is determined whether or not it is the execution time (start time) of the retry process (S2903). ). In this embodiment, the timing at which 1600 ms (1.6 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the V round is set as the execution time of the retry process, and during that time, the comparison judgment (S2901) between the number of balls entered into the V attacker and the number of ejected balls is executed. It is possible. Then, when 1600 ms has elapsed from the end of the V round while the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls do not match, it is time to execute the retry process (YES in S2903). Therefore, in S2903, it is determined whether or not 1600 ms has elapsed from the end of the V round.

If it is determined by S2903 that it is not the execution time (start time) of the retry processing (NO in S2903), the process shifts to the processing of S2906. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time to execute the retry process (YES in S2903), it is determined whether or not the number of ejected balls is less than the number of ejected balls with respect to the number of inconsistent balls and the number of ejected balls (S2904). .. As a result, if the number of ejected balls is larger than the number of incoming balls (NO in S2904), the process shifts to the processing of S2906, and if the number of ejected balls is less than the number of incoming balls (YES in S2904), the retry process is executed (S2905). ), Finish this process.

Here, the retry process is a process of repeatedly operating / stopping the movable piece 150 (ON / OFF of the movable piece solenoid 151) a predetermined number of times (executed a plurality of times). When the number of balls entered into the V attacker exceeds the number of ejected balls, the game ball entered into the V attacker has not yet passed through the specific area 39 or the non-specific area 49 (specific area sensor 39a or non-specific area sensor 49a). Not detected by). Possible causes include ball clogging on the path (game ball passage) toward the specific area sensor 39a or the non-specific area sensor 49a, ball biting by the movable piece 150, and the like. Therefore, the retry process is executed in order to eliminate the ball biting caused by the movable piece 150.

In this embodiment, the execution time (execution period) of the retry process is set to 280 ms. Then, during the period from the end of the V round to the arrival of the retry process execution time (1600 ms) and the period until the retry process execution period (280 ms) elapses (1880 ms), the number of balls entered and ejected to the V attacker Comparison determination (S2901) is executed in a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms cycle). Therefore, after the first comparison determination is executed with the end of the V round, a plurality of comparison determinations including the first comparison determination are executed before the retry processing execution time arrives. .. Further, when the retry process is executed, the comparison determination may be executed a plurality of times even during the execution period.

If it is determined that the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls match (YES in S2902) as a result of one or more comparison judgments after the end of the V round and until the execution time of the retry process arrives, the retry process and the following will be described. The comparison determination process (S2805) ends without performing error processing. In addition, if it is determined that the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls match as a result of one or more comparison judgments during the execution period of the retry process after the execution of the retry process is started (YES in S2902), an error described later will occur. The comparison determination process (S2805) ends without performing the process. In this case, it means that the ball biting or the like is eliminated by the retry process.

In this embodiment, the retry process is executed only when the number of balls ejected by the V attacker is smaller than the number of balls entered (the number of balls entered into the V attacker is larger than the number of balls ejected) (YES in S2904, S2905). That is, if the number of ejected balls is larger than the number of balls entered (NO in S2904), the retry process is not executed. This means that the number of ejected balls is larger than the number of ejected balls (the number of ejected balls is smaller than the number of ejected balls), which means that the ball is jammed or bitten on the upstream side of the specific area sensor 39a or the non-specific area sensor 49a in the V attacker. This is because it is unlikely that such a situation has occurred, and it is unlikely that the situation where the number of discharged balls is larger than the number of balls entered will be resolved even if the retry process is executed. Therefore, this embodiment has a configuration that avoids (eliminates) unnecessary retry processing (operation of the movable piece 150).

Next, in S2906, it is determined whether or not it is the execution time (start time) of error processing (S2906). In this embodiment, the timing at which 1880 ms (1600 ms + 280 ms) has elapsed from the end of the V round is set as the execution time of the error processing. Therefore, after the end of the V round, if 1880 ms elapses while the number of balls entered into the V attacker and the number of ejected balls do not match, it is time to execute the error processing (YES in S2906), and the predetermined error processing is executed accordingly. Then (S2907), this process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2906 that it is not the time to execute the error processing (NO in S2906), this processing ends without executing the error processing.

The error processing executed by the S2907 differs depending on the relationship between the number of balls entering and the number of ejected balls that are inconsistent, that is, the situation of the inconsistency.

Specifically, when the number of ejected V attackers is less than the number of balls entered, (A1) the message (first error character image) of "V attacker mismatch error" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, (A2). ) The frame lamp 66 is lit in red, (A3) an error notification sound is output from the speaker 67, (A4) the operation of the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b) is stopped, (A4). A5) The operation of the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is stopped, and the five processes of stopping the operation are executed as error processes. The error processing (five processes (A1) to (A5) in this example) executed when the number of ejected balls is less than the number of balls entered is also referred to as "first error processing". Further, the error processing of (A1) to (A3) performed by using the image display device 7, the frame lamp 66, and the speaker 67 is an abnormality in which the number of discharged balls of the V attacker is smaller than the number of balls entered (also referred to as "first error"). The occurrence of.) Is notified to the outside, and the notification is also referred to as "first error notification".

On the other hand, when the number of discharged V-attackers is larger than the number of balls entered, (B1) the message (second error character image) of "V-attacker abnormal discharge error" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, (B2). The two processes of lighting the frame lamp 66 in blue are executed as error processes. The error processing (two processes (B1) and (B2) in this example) executed when the number of ejected balls is larger than the number of balls entered is also referred to as "second error processing". Further, the error processing of (B1) and (B2) performed by using the image display device 7 and the frame lamp 66 is an abnormality in which the number of discharged balls of the V attacker is larger than the number of balls entered (also referred to as "second error"). The occurrence is notified to the outside, and the notification is also referred to as "second error notification".

In this embodiment, in the first error processing, the operation of the special symbol display unit and the large prize-winning device is stopped in addition to the first error notification, while in the second error processing, the operation of the special symbol display unit and the large prize-winning device is stopped. It is supposed that the second error notification is performed without. The reason for adopting such a configuration is as follows. That is, when the first error (number of ejected <number of balls entered) occurs, there is a possibility that the game ball remains in the V attacker due to ball jamming, ball biting, etc., and the big hit game (round game) in this situation. ) May cause damage or failure of the V attacker (second prize winning device 36), and may not allow the jackpot game (round game) to proceed normally. In addition, if a ball is jammed or bitten in a V round during a big hit game scheduled to pass through V, and the game ball that should pass through V cannot pass through V, the game will proceed as it is. , Since the game progresses without acquiring the privilege (high probability state) that the player should have originally acquired, it is disadvantageous for the player, and due to this, the player and the game hall It may lead to trouble. From this point of view, when the first error (number of discharged balls <number of balls entered) occurs, the operation of the special symbol display unit and the large winning device is stopped thereafter to stop the progress of the game. To stop the operation of the special symbol display unit is to make the variable display of the special symbol infeasible. In addition, to stop the operation of the big winning device means to keep the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 (V attacker) in the closed state (second state) (assuming that they cannot be opened) and make a round. It is to make the game infeasible (the jackpot game cannot proceed).

On the other hand, when the second error (number of ejected> number of balls entered) occurs, the second error occurs due to fraudulent acts such as thread suspension and radio wave to the V attacker (specific area 39, specific area sensor 39a). It is probable that it occurred. In this case, the V attacker (second prize winning device 36) may be damaged or broken, as in the case of the first error, or the player should acquire the privilege (high probability state) that the player should have originally acquired. There is little need to stop the progress of the game because it is unlikely that there will be any disadvantages such as being unable to do so. On the other hand, since there is a possibility of fraudulent activity, it is necessary to notify the occurrence of the second error to the outside. From this point of view, when a second error (number of discharged balls> number of balls entered) occurs, only the error notification (second error notification) is performed without stopping the operation of the special symbol display unit and the large winning device. There is. Even when the second error occurs, it is possible to stop the operation of the special symbol display unit and the grand prize device.

As described above, in this embodiment, the processing contents are different between the first error processing and the second error processing, and the first error processing has a larger number of processing than the second error processing. Therefore, the first error can be regarded as a more severe error than the second error. The content of error processing and the number of processing are not limited to those shown in this embodiment.

In S2907, when the first error processing is executed, the special symbol fluctuation prohibition flag for stopping the operation of the special symbol display unit and the grand prize device operation prohibition flag for stopping the operation of the grand prize device are set to ON, respectively. do. When the special symbol variation prohibition flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 is configured not to newly start the variation display of the special symbol. Further, when the big winning device operation prohibition flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 is configured not to newly start the round game.

Further, in the S2907, when executing the first error processing, the message display of "V attacker mismatch error", the red lighting of the frame lamp 66, and the first error notification command instructing the output of the error notification sound from the speaker 67 are executed in the RAM. Set in the output buffer of. The set first error notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the output processing of S201. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 displays a message of "V attacker mismatch error", lights the frame lamp 66 in red, and notifies the error from the speaker 67 based on the transmitted first error notification command. Perform sound output.

Further, in the S2907, when the second error processing is executed, the message display of "V attacker abnormal discharge error" and the second error notification command instructing the blue lighting of the frame lamp 66 are set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set second error notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the output processing of S201. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 executes the message display of "V attacker abnormal discharge error" and the blue lighting of the frame lamp 66 based on the transmitted second error notification command.

When the first error occurs and the first error processing is executed, the RAM clear switch (not shown) instructing the execution of RAM clear is pressed after clearing the ball clogging or ball biting in the V attacker. By turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 again, the first error processing is completed and the first error is canceled. That is, when the first error notification is completed, the special symbol fluctuation prohibition flag and the large winning device operation prohibition flag are turned off.

When the second error occurs and the second error processing is executed, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on again while the RAM clear switch (not shown) instructing the execution of RAM clear is pressed. , The second error processing is completed and the second error is cleared. That is, the second error notification ends. However, after the occurrence of the second error (after the execution of the second error processing), the second error notification ends (the second error is canceled) when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed. This is because it is sufficient if the persons involved in the game hall can be made aware of the possibility of fraudulent activity by error notification.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the processing of S2905 functions as a “retry processing means”. Further, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the processing of S2907 functions as an “error processing means”.

In this embodiment, the above comparison determination process (S2805) is executed in the interval period (predetermined period) after the end of the V round. Here, when the jackpot game related to the 7R jackpot (also referred to as “7R jackpot game”) is executed and the V round of the 7R jackpot game is completed, the seventh round is the V round, so that the end of the V round is reached. The 7R jackpot game ends. Then, the ending period is set after the interval period after the end of the V round (S2120). In this case, a series of periods from the start of the interval period after the end of the V round to the end of the ending period can be regarded as one ending period (end period). That is, when the V round of the 7R jackpot game is completed and the comparison determination process (S2805) is executed, the comparison determination process is executed in the ending period (end period) after the final round as the V round is completed. It can be said that.

[Game status setting process]
As shown in FIG. 36, in the game state setting process (S2124) executed at the end of the special game state, first, it is determined whether or not the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag that is turned ON in the specific area sensor detection process (S207) described later.

When it is determined by S2201 that the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the probability change flag is turned ON (S2202), "100" is set in the probability change counter (S2203), and the V flag is turned OFF (S2203). S2204). Then, while turning on the time saving flag (S2206), the time saving counter is set to "100" (S2207), and the process proceeds to S2212. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, whether or not to set the gaming state after the big hit game to the high probability state is determined based on whether or not the V flag is ON in this gaming state or the like setting process. I have decided.

Here, when the V flag is ON, the value set in the probability variation counter is the number of times that the special symbol hit / miss determination can be executed with high probability. In this embodiment, since "100" is set in the probability variation counter, the high probability state is continued until the variation display of the special symbol 100 times (special symbol winning / failing determination) is executed. However, if a big hit occurs within 100 times, the high probability state ends when the big hit game is executed. Further, when the probability change flag is ON, "100" is also set in the time saving counter, so that the time saving state (open extension state) is also set while the high probability state is set, and the high probability state is set. The time saving state will end with the end of.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2201 that the V flag is OFF (NO in S2201), the time saving flag is turned on (S2209) without turning on the probability change flag, and "100" is set in the time saving counter (S2209). S2210), proceed to the processing of S2212. As a result, the gaming state after the big hit game this time becomes a low probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state (that is, a low probability high base state).

In addition, even if there is no V passage during the V round for some reason such as no launch of a game ball in a jackpot game related to a V pass scheduled jackpot such as 7R 1st jackpot (V flag is OFF), the relevant The game state after the big hit game is not set to the high probability state, and the time is shortened (low accuracy and high base state).

The low-accuracy high-based state ends when either the condition that the variation display of the special symbol is performed 100 times (the special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed 100 times) or the next big hit occurs is satisfied. .. The time reduction counter and the probability variation counter count the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the number of variation display of the second special symbol. The values set in the time reduction counter and the probability variation counter are not limited to this embodiment, and the values can be set in consideration of game playability, ball ejection rate, and the like.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the above processes of S2201 to S2210 functions as a “game state control means”.

Next, in S2212, the type (judgment type) of the special symbol winning / failing judgment that triggered the execution of the big hit game this time is specified by referring to the judgment type flag (S2212). As described above, the determination type flag is composed of a first determination flag indicating that it is the first special symbol hit / miss determination and a second determination flag indicating that it is the second special symbol hit / fail determination, and is a first determination flag. And any of the second determination flags is turned on in S2007 of the above-mentioned special symbol determination process (S1106). Based on this ON determination flag, the type (judgment type) of the special symbol winning / failing determination that triggered the execution of the big hit game this time is specified.

Next, in S2213, it is determined whether or not the irregular flag is ON (S2213). The irregular flag is a flag that is set (ON) in the specific area sensor detection process (S207) described later when irregular V passage or irregular V non-passage occurs. In this embodiment, as irregular flags, an irregular V passing flag indicating that irregular V passage has occurred and an irregular V non-passing flag indicating that irregular V non-passing has occurred are provided. When irregular V passage occurs, the irregular V passage flag is turned ON, and when irregular V non-passage occurs, the irregular V non-pass flag is ON. When neither irregular V passage nor irregular V non-passage occurs, both the irregular V passage flag and the irregular V non-passage flag are OFF.

When it is determined in S2113 that the irregular V passing flag or the irregular V non-passing flag is ON (YES in S2213), it is specified in S2212 as lighting pattern data that defines the display mode (lighting mode) of the hit indicator 48. Irregular lighting pattern data according to the determined judgment type is set (S2214). On the other hand, when it is determined that both the irregular V passing flag and the irregular V non-passing flag are not ON (OFF) (NO in S2213), the lighting pattern data that defines the display mode (lighting mode) of the hit indicator 48. , The normal lighting pattern data corresponding to the judgment type specified in S2212 is set (S2215).

As described above, in the hit indicator 48, depending on the lighting mode of the three LEDs (see FIG. 4) of "b1 to b3", "big hit game in which an irregular event occurs" or "irregular event occurs". It is possible to notify whether the execution trigger of the "big hit game that did not occur" is the first special symbol winning / failing determination or the second special symbol winning / failing determination (judgment notification). In order to perform this determination notification, the lighting pattern data of the three LEDs constituting the hit display 48 is set. When the set lighting pattern data is output by the output process (S201), the three LEDs constituting the hit indicator 48 are lit according to the lighting pattern data.

The irregular lighting pattern data is lighting pattern data corresponding to the case where irregular V passage or irregular V non-passage occurs, and the normal lighting pattern data includes both irregular V passage and irregular V non-passage. It is lighting pattern data corresponding to the case where it does not (when the big hit game ends normally). The lighting mode of the hit indicator 48 (three LEDs) and the determination notification execution period for performing the determination notification are as described above.

After setting the lighting pattern data of the hit indicator 48 with S2214 or S2215, the determination type flag and the irregular flag are turned off (S2216), and this processing is completed.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the above processes of S2212 to S2215 functions as a “determination notification execution means”.

[Specific area sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the specific area sensor detection process (S207) after the special figure operation process (S206). As shown in FIG. 37, in the specific area sensor detection process (S207), first, it is determined whether or not the V flag indicating that the game ball has passed (V passage) to the specific area 39 is OFF (). S2400). As a result, when it is determined that the V flag is not OFF, that is, it is ON (NO in S2400), this processing is completed without performing the processing after S2401. This is because when the V flag is ON, V passage has already occurred and the processing of S2404 described later has been executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2400 that the V flag is OFF (NO in S2400), it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401). As a result, when it is determined that the detection by the specific area sensor 39a has occurred (YES in S2401), it is determined whether or not the detection time is during the specific area valid period (V valid period) (S2402).

When it is determined by S2402 that the specific area is not in the valid period (V invalid period) (NO in S2402), the invalid period passage command is set in the RAM output buffer without turning on the V flag (S2403). , Finish this process. That is, when the game ball passes through the specific area 39 (when detected by the specific area sensor 39a) during a period other than the specific area valid period (V invalid period), the passage is a specific area abnormal passage (specific area error). Yes, an invalid period pass command is set to indicate that. When this invalid period passage command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) or the frame based on the received invalid period passage command. A predetermined error notification is performed using the lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the speaker 67, and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined by S2402 that the specific area is valid (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned ON (S2404). That is, when the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35 in the V round (7th round) passes through the specific area 39 during the valid period of the specific area (when detected by the specific area sensor 39a), this is an opportunity. The V flag is turned on.

Next, in S2405, it is determined whether or not the jackpot that triggered the current V passage (V flag ON) is the jackpot scheduled to pass V (S2405). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot is scheduled to pass through V (YES in S2405), the command for passing through a specific area is set in the output buffer of RAM (S2406), and the normal V-passing designation command is set in the output buffer of RAM (YES in S2405). S2407), this process is completed.

When the normal V passage designation command is set, that is, when the normal V passage occurs, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs a normal V passage signal as external information from the information output circuit (not shown).

When the specific area passage command set in S2406 is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201), the staging control microcomputer 91 receives the image display device 7 (display screen) based on the received specific area passage command. 7a), a speaker 67, or the like is used to perform an effect of notifying the occurrence of V passage (also referred to as “V passage notification effect”). The set (transmission) of the specific area passage command is executed based on the first specific area passage (first V passage) during the V round (during the specific area validity period), and the second and subsequent ones are executed. It is not executed for V passage.

Further, when the normal V passage designation command set in S2407 is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201), the staging control microcomputer 91 is based on the received normal V pass designation command, and this time V It is specified that the passage is a normal V passage (normal V passage), and the occurrence of the normal V passage is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as jackpot history information. That is, the normal V-passing designation command is a command that allows the sub-control unit to specify that V-passing has occurred in the V-round of the jackpot game related to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (the V-round has been normally digested). Is. A predetermined area of the RAM in which the jackpot history information is stored is also referred to as a "history information storage area".

Here, the jackpot history information is information on jackpot games executed in the past, such as information on jackpot type (also referred to as “big hit type information”), information on V passage (also referred to as “V passage information”), and the like. Is included. Although the details will be described later, the sub-control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) stores information on the jackpot game for the most recently executed predetermined number of times (for example, the latest 10 times) as jackpot history information, and the jackpot history information. Based on the above, it is possible to notify information about the executed jackpot game.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2405 that the jackpot that triggered the current V passage (V flag ON) is not the V passage scheduled jackpot (NO in S2405), that is, the trigger of the current V passage (V flag ON). If the jackpot that becomes V is a jackpot that is not scheduled to pass through V, set the irregular V pass specification command in the output buffer of the RAM (S2408), turn on the irregular V pass flag (S2409), and end this process. ..

The game control microcomputer 81 outputs an irregular V-passing signal as external information from an information output circuit (not shown) when an irregular V-passing designation command is set, that is, when irregular V-passing occurs. do.

When the irregular V-passage designation command set in S2408 is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201), the staging control microcomputer 91 receives the irregular V-passage designation command based on the received irregular V-passage designation command. It is specified that the passage is an abnormal V passage (irregular V passage), and the occurrence of irregular V passage is stored in a predetermined area (history information storage area) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as jackpot history information. do. In other words, the irregular V-passing designation command sub-controls that V-passing (occurrence of irregular V-passing) that should not normally occur in the V-round of the jackpot game related to the V-non-passing scheduled jackpot. This is a command that can be specified by the department.

In addition, when V is passed in the V round of the jackpot game related to the V-passing scheduled jackpot, a specific area passing command is transmitted based on the V-passing (S2046), and the V-round of the jackpot game related to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is transmitted. When V passage (irregular V passage) occurs in, the specific area passage command is not transmitted based on the V passage. Therefore, the V-passage notification effect is not executed for the irregular V-passage (the V-passage notification effect based on the irregular V-passage cannot be executed). As a result, the occurrence of irregular V passage is not produced.

The above is the processing when V passage (including irregular) occurs during the V validity period in the V round. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2401 that the specific area sensor is not ON (OFF) (NO in S2401), that is, when V passage has not occurred, it is determined whether or not the V round has ended. (S2410) If it is determined that the process has not ended (NO in S2410), this process ends without performing the process after S2411.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the V round is completed (YES in S2410), it is determined whether or not the V round is due to the big hit scheduled to pass through V (S2411). Then, when it is determined that it is not due to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (NO in S2411), that is, when the completed V round is due to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the normal V non-passing designation command is set in the output buffer of the RAM. Then (S2412), this process is completed. Here, the normal V non-passage means that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 39 in the V round of the jackpot game related to the jackpot scheduled to pass through V, that is, V passage occurs according to the specifications (design) of the jackpot. It means I didn't do it.

The game control microcomputer 81 outputs a normal V non-passing signal as external information from an information output circuit (not shown) when a normal V non-passing designation command is set, that is, when a normal V non-passing occurs. do.

When the normal V non-passing designation command set in S2412 is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201), the staging control microcomputer 91 receives the normal V non-passing designation command based on the received normal V non-passing designation command. It is specified that the non-passage is normal V non-passage (normal V non-passage), and the occurrence of normal V non-passage is used as jackpot history information, and a predetermined area (history information storage area) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is used. Remember in. That is, the normal V non-passing designation command can specify on the sub-control unit side that V-passing did not occur in the V-round of the jackpot game related to the V-non-passing scheduled jackpot (the V-round was normally digested). Is the command to be.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2411 that the completed V round is due to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (YES in S2411), the irregular V non-passing designation command is set in the RAM output buffer (S2413), and a. Turn on the regular V non-passing flag (S2414) to end this process.

The game control microcomputer 81 outputs an irregular V non-passing signal as external information in an information output circuit (not shown) when an irregular V non-passing designation command is set, that is, when irregular V non-passing occurs. ) Is output.

When the irregular V non-passing designation command set in S2413 is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201), the staging control microcomputer 91 this time is based on the received irregular V non-passing designation command. It is specified that the V non-passage is not normal V non-passage (irregular V non-passage), and the occurrence of irregular V non-passage is used as jackpot history information, and a predetermined area (history) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is used. Store in the information storage area). In other words, the irregular V non-passing designation command did not occur in the V round of the jackpot game related to the V-passing scheduled jackpot, and the V-passing that would normally occur did not occur (irregular V non-passing occurred). Is a command that can be specified on the sub-control unit side.

Here, the passage of irregular V is also referred to as "first passage status", the passage of normal V is also referred to as "second passage status", and the non-passage of irregular V is also referred to as "third passage status". , Normal V non-passage is also referred to as "fourth passage situation". In addition, the irregular V passage specification command is also called the "first passage status specification command", the normal V passage specification command is also called the "second passage status specification command", and the irregular V non-pass specification command. Is also called a "third passage status specification command", and a normal V non-passage designation command is also called a "fourth passage status designation command". These four types of designation commands related to V passage / non-passage are generally ". Also called "passage status specification command".

[Processing at the time of starting ball entry]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a start ball entry process (S209) after a specific area sensor detection process (S207). As shown in FIG. 38, in the start ball entry processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out. (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (S2502). As a result, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has not increased (NO in S2502), the process proceeds to S2506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S2502), the process proceeds to S2503. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 in S307 in the start opening sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start opening.

In S2503, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure hold storage unit is read (acquired information). S2503). Next, in S2504, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S2504). Specifically, the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not) acquired at the time of entering the starting port depends on the current gaming state (whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state). Then, it is judged whether it is a big hit or a miss. If the determination result (preliminary determination result) is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined. This is a pre-judgment (so-called "hold look-ahead") in which the hit / fail judgment (judgment of whether or not it is a big hit) for the special figure 2 hold is performed prior to the hit / fail judgment (S1303, S1304) in the special figure 2 hit / miss judgment process (S1202). ).

The pre-judgment is a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8A), that is, a jackpot determination table for a high-probability state if it is a high-probability state, and a normal state if it is a normal state (low-probability state). Based on the jackpot determination table, it is possible to determine whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value. In addition, as another preliminary determination mode, as a variation pattern information determination table capable of determining variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table for a high probability state (for a high probability state). It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern information determination table of the above is provided. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the acquired random number value (value of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to do. Then, from the selected fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and whether or not a game effect with high reliability of the big hit is executed.

Next, in S2505, game information including at least the reserved ball number data related to the second special symbol read by S2501 and the information predetermined by S2504 (predetermined information) is generated as the special figure 2 start ball entry command. , Set in the RAM output buffer (S2505). In addition, as a special figure 2 start entry command, a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read by S2503 may be transmitted to the sub-control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted as it is. Is not transmitted as it is, but the game information acquired based on the value of the random number acquired in Special Figure 2 (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information and the like) may be transmitted.

Further, by analyzing the special figure 2 start-in ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, whether or not the information is related to a big hit, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is several, and the big hit type. Can be identified by the sub-control unit 90. Further, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entry command, whether or not the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when it is determined in a high probability state, and a low probability. It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when it is judged by the state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start entry command as hold (effect hold information), predetermines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether the result is correct or not in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect hold information determined to be a big hit is stored in.

From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not among the random number values read by S2503 is not sent to the sub-control unit as it is, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other big hit type (big hit). Command data including information indicating the value of the random number value for determining the type) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) and the information indicating the result of the pre-judgment are generated and set as the special figure 2 start entry command. It is possible.

Next, in S2506, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" in the same manner as in the above-mentioned processing according to Special Figure 2 (S2506). As a result, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has not increased (NO in S2506), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S2506), the process proceeds to S2507. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port 20.

In S2507, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2507), and when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, that is, it is in a high base state (YES in S2507), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2507 that the time reduction flag is OFF, that is, it is in a low base state (NO in S2507), the process proceeds to the process related to the preliminary determination after S2508. Here, when the time saving flag is ON, that is, when the current gaming state is the high base state, the opening extension function that increases the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is operating, and whether or not the special figure 2 is correct or not. The determination (see FIG. 8B) is easy to make. Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the digestion of the special figure 2 hold (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the digestion of the special figure 1 hold (variation display of the first special symbol) ( So-called special figure 2 priority variable machine). In such a configuration, for example, when the preliminary determination of the special figure 1 is performed, the result is notified to the player by an effect such as a notice, and the result of the preliminary determination is clearly shown to be a big hit, the player By using the priority of special figure 2 hold digestion, the special figure 2 hold is intentionally eliminated (set to "0") at any timing, and the big hit related to special figure 1 showing the result of the preliminary judgment is intended. It is possible to perform technical intervention such as generating a target. It is not preferable from the viewpoint of fairness of the game that the player can adjust the timing of occurrence of such a big hit. Therefore, when the current gaming state is not a low base state but a high base state (YES in S2507), this process is terminated without performing the process related to the preliminary determination of the special figure 1 after S2508.

The processing of S2508 to S2510 is the same processing as that of S2503 to S2505 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure hold storage unit is read (S2508). Pre-determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S2509), and the game information including at least the reserved ball number data related to the first special symbol read by S2501 and the information pre-determined by S2509 (pre-determination information) is obtained. Special figure 1 Generated as a start-in ball command and set in the RAM output buffer (S2510). The pre-determination (holding look-ahead) of S2509 is performed prior to the pass / fail determination (S1603, S1604) in the special figure 1 pass / fail determination process (S1207) described later.

[Power failure monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power supply cutoff monitoring process (S210) after the start / entry process (S209). As shown in FIG. 39, in the power cutoff monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not a power cutoff signal is input (S2601). Then, if there is no input of the power cutoff signal (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if there is an input of a power off signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether it is a probability change, whether it is in a big hit game, some number of reserved balls, some number of remaining fluctuations of probability change / time reduction). Etc.) are stored (backed up) in RAM (S2602), and the power off flag is turned ON (S2603). After that, loop processing is performed without returning to interrupt processing (S105). In S2602, in addition to the data related to the current state of the gaming machine, it is possible to store (back up) arbitrary data predetermined as a backup target.

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the processing content (control processing by the sub-control unit 90) of the staging control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 47. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the processing contents of the staging control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit).

The staging control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 performs the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 40 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (when the power supply by the power board 109 is started). The program is read from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and executed. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, the CPU initialization process is first performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and the like are set, and various flags, statuses and counters are reset.

Next, in S4002, it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). The power cutoff signal is output from the power supply board 109 to the sub-control board 90 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. Then, if the determination result of S4002 is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result of S4002 is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized, but the power off signal is output. If it is ON and the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed after that. For this reason, the processing of S4001 to S4003 is also referred to as "power-on processing".

Here, when the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the power-on processing (S4001 to S4003), it notifies that the power-on processing is being executed until the power-on processing is completed (power supply). (Notification at the time of input) is executed. Specifically, a message indicating that the power-on processing is being executed is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a notification sound indicating that effect is output from the speaker 67.

As described above, when the power is turned on, at least the CPU initialization process (S4001) is executed, and if the judgment of S4002 is a negative judgment (NO in S4002), the RAM initialization (S4003) is also executed. If the CPU initialization process (S4001) is executed and the RAM initialization (S4003) is not executed, the message "Power is being restored" is displayed, and the CPU initialization process (S4001) and RAM initialization (S4003) are displayed. If both are executed, the message "Ramm clearing" is displayed. These messages are displayed by transmitting a command (power-on command) from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100 and processing by the CPU (image control microcomputer 101) of the image control board 100 that receives the command. Will be executed. Whether to display the message "power is being restored" or "ram is being cleared" is determined by the content (type) of the command transmitted from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100. Further, in this embodiment, the notification sound of the power-on processing is set to one type, and is output from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106.

The S4004 disables interrupts. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random number for determining the effect includes a random number for determining the advance effect that determines the advance effect and a random number for determining the effect symbol that determines the effect symbol. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Instead of adding the random values by 1 at the time of updating, it may be added by 2 or the like. The random number for determining the effect is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying that the starting ball has arrived is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80 ( It can be used when a variation start command) is transmitted, when a variation effect pattern described later is determined, and the like. The storage location of the acquired random number for determining the effect is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

Following the random number seed update process (S4005), the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Each control board (each control unit) that received the command uses various effect devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. Execute the production (production design game production, special game production related to the big hit game, etc.).

Following the command transmission process (S4006), interrupts are enabled (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of the effect symbols and the like executed on the display screen 7a (effect symbol display area 7b) of the image display device 7, lighting control of various lamps, and operation of the movable decorative member are performed. It is possible to control and control the audio output from the speaker.

[Receive interrupt processing]
As shown in FIG. 41, in the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is outside the staging control microcomputer 91. It is determined whether or not the signal has been input to the INT input unit (S4101). Then, when it is determined that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is completed. This receive interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 42, in the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d is performed (S4201). ..

Next, in S4202, a lamp data output process for outputting lamp data for driving decorative lamps (LEDs and the like) such as a board lamp 5 and a frame lamp 66 is performed (S4202). The lamp data is created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later.

Next, in S4203, drive data output processing for outputting drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 and the speaker 67 is performed (S4203). This drive data is also created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204), and this process is completed.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 43, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the receive command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed.

Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed in which the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4303), and the switch data stored by the switch state acquisition process is performed. A switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a is performed based on (S4304).

Next, the jackpot history information processing (S4305) described later is performed. After that, other processing is performed (S4306), and this processing is completed. For other processing (S4306), lamp data (data for controlling light emission of the board lamp 5 and frame lamp 66) and drive data (data for controlling the operation of the movable decorative member 14 and the speaker 67) are created. It includes various processes such as creating a speaker and updating a random number for determining an effect.

[Received command analysis processing]
As shown in FIG. 44, in the reception command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the start ball entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4395), and it is determined that the start ball entry command has not been received. If (NO in S4395), the process shifts to S4401 processing, and if it is determined that the start entry command has been received (YES in S4395), the effect hold information storage process (S4400) is performed and the process shifts to S4401 processing. ..

The effect hold information storage process (S4400) is a random process for determining the type of jackpot (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination) included in the start-in ball command (special figure 1 start-in ball command or special figure 2 start-in ball command) received in S4395. Game information such as numerical values and fluctuation pattern random values) according to the type of special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) and the number of special symbol reserved balls when sending and receiving the start entry command (at the time of command generation). , It is stored in a predetermined effect hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in the shift memory format.

For example, when the received start-in ball command is the special figure 1 start-in ball command corresponding to the reserved ball number "4" in the special figure 1, the pre-judgment result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 start-in ball command. Etc. are stored as the special figure 1 effect hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage content (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub control board 90 is the special figure hold storage unit (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure) in the main control board (main control unit) 80 described above. It matches the stored contents (acquired information) of the reserved storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect holding information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also a “acquisition information storage means”.

In S4401, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and if it is determined that a variation start command has been received (YES in S4401), the variation effect start process (S4402) described later is performed. If it is determined that the variation start command has not been received (NO in S4401), the process shifts to the S4406 process without performing the variation effect start process.

In S4406, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4406), and if it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4406), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed and the variation effect (S4406). Performs variable effect end processing (S4407) to end the effect pattern game effect).

In the variation effect end process (S4407), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays the effect symbol 8 variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Stop display and end the fluctuation effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S4406 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4406), the process shifts to the processing of S4408 without performing the fluctuation effect end processing. It should be noted that the variation effect includes various effects performed according to the variation display of the special symbol.

Next, in S4408, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4408), and if it is determined that the opening command has been received (YES in S4408), it is executed in the special game (big hit game). The special game effect selection process for selecting the pattern (effect mode) of the special game effect is performed (S4409). The special game production includes at least the opening production performed during the opening period before the opening of the big prize opening (before the start of the first round) accompanying the start of the special game, and the round game (large prize) during the special game (during the big hit game). It includes a round effect (big hit game effect) that is executed according to the progress of the mouth-entry ball game).

In this embodiment, the opening command according to the type of jackpot is transmitted from the main control board 80, and the length of the opening period according to the type of jackpot started this time by the opening command (opening). Time), opening production, round production, etc. are specified.

In the special game effect selection process (S4409), the effect pattern of the selected special game effect (opening effect, round effect, etc.) and information based on the received opening command (opening command type, opening time, jackpot game at the start timing, etc.) A command at the start of a special game that can specify the jackpot type, etc. relating to the above is set in the output buffer of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. When the set special game start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays the special game effect according to the progress of the big hit game in the image display device 7. Execute on the display screen 7a.

For example, when the type of the jackpot to be started this time is the 7R first jackpot, the image shows the opening effect indicating the start of the jackpot game related to the jackpot scheduled to pass through V, that is, the jackpot game on the premise of generating a high probability state. This is performed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The opening effect in this case is an effect that impresses the start of a big hit game that is premised on the transition to a high accuracy and high base state with the acquisition of a prize ball. For example, a "super big hit" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It displays a character image such as "V jackpot" or "V jackpot" and outputs a corresponding effect sound. Then, following the opening effect, a round effect corresponding to the 7R jackpot is developed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 according to the progress of the round (based on the reception of the round start command in S4418 described later). ..

In addition, when the type of jackpot to be started this time is 7R second jackpot, the opening that indicates the start of the jackpot game related to "V non-passing scheduled jackpot", that is, the jackpot game on the premise that a high probability state is not generated. The effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The opening effect in this case is an effect that impresses the start of the big hit game on the premise of the transition to the time saving state (high base state) with the acquisition of the prize ball. For example, the "big hit" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , "Chance jackpot" and other text images are displayed, and the corresponding production sound is output. Then, following the opening effect, a round effect corresponding to the 7R jackpot is developed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 according to the progress of the round (based on the reception of the round start command in S4418 described later). .. In addition, the opening effect corresponding to the 15R jackpot can be executed in the same manner for the 15R jackpot.

Next, in S4410, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4410). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (YES in S4410), the ending effect selection process for selecting the execution pattern of the effect at the end of the special game (ending effect), the type of the effect mode after the end of the special game, etc. is performed (). Proceed to S4411) and S4412 processing (FIG. 45).

In this embodiment, the ending command according to the type of the big hit and whether or not the game ball has passed to the specific area 39 during the big hit game (7th round) is transmitted from the main control board 80. The ending command specifies the length of the ending period (ending time). Then, in the ending effect selection process (S4411), the effect pattern of the selected ending effect, the information based on the received ending command (type of ending command, ending time, type of jackpot related to the completed jackpot game, and after the jackpot game). A command at the end of the special game that can specify the effect mode, etc.) is set in the output buffer of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. When the set command at the end of the special game is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays an effect related to the end of the big hit game on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Run with.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received by S4408 (NO in S4408), the process shifts to the processing of S4410 without processing S4409, and it is determined that the ending command has not been received by S4410 (NO). S4410 NO), shift to S4412 processing without performing S4411 processing.

In S4412, it is determined whether or not a specific area passage command is received from the main control board 80 (S4412). Then, if the specific area pass command is not received (NO in S4412), the process proceeds to S4418, and if it is received (YES in S4412), the V pass notification command is sent to the output buffer of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. Set to (S4415).

When the V-passage notification command set in S4415 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 is an image for notifying that V-passage (normal V-passage) has occurred. The data is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the V-passage notification effect based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Examples of the V-passage notification effect include displaying a large character image of "V" in the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and outputting a sound effect indicating V-passage. The V-passage notification effect is also referred to as "passage effect", and the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) and the image control unit 100 that control the execution of the V-passage notification effect are also referred to as "passage effect execution means". say.

In this embodiment, the V-passage notification effect is executed only when V-passage occurs in the V-round of the jackpot game related to the V-passage scheduled jackpot, that is, when normal V-passage occurs. That is, when V passage occurs in the V round of the jackpot game related to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, that is, when irregular V passage occurs, the V passage notification effect is not executed (cannot be executed). This is because a specific area passing command is transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 only when V passing (normal V passing) occurs in the V round of the big hit game related to the V passing scheduled big hit (S2406). reference).

Here, during the execution of the V passage notification effect, an unexpected situation such as a power failure may occur, or the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (power supply board 109) may be turned off to turn off various boards from the power supply board 109. It is assumed that the supply of electric power to the types, devices, equipment, etc. (see FIG. 5) is stopped, and then the power switch is turned on and the power is turned on. In this case, when the power is turned on, the power-on processing (S4001 to S4003) is executed as described above, and during that time, the power-on notification (message display, notification sound output) is executed (power-on notification means). ), At this time, the V-passage notification effect that was being executed before the power supply was cut off is not executed. This is because, in this embodiment, the V-passage notification effect is not the target of backup due to the power outage, and the power supply is cut off during the execution of the V-passage notification effect and the power supply by the power supply board 109 is stopped. This is because the data related to the execution of the V passage notification effect is cleared at that time.

Next, the S4418 determines whether or not a round start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4418). If it is determined that the round start command has not been received (NO in S4418), the process proceeds to S4420 without processing S4419, and if it is determined that the round start command has been received (YES in S4418), it has been received. The round specification command corresponding to the round start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4419), and the process proceeds to S4420.

The round start command transmitted from the main control board 80 includes information that can specify the number of rounds to be started (start round), and is a microcomputer for effect control of the sub control board 90. 91 specifies the number of rounds of the start round based on the received round start command, and sets a round designation command indicating the number of rounds in the output buffer. When the round designation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 corresponds to the big hit game being executed according to the number of rounds specified based on the round designation command. The round effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In S4420, other processing related to the effect control is performed, and this processing is completed. Other processing performed by the S4420 includes processing based on reception commands other than the above-mentioned commands (for example, a normal symbol fluctuation start command, a normal symbol fluctuation stop command, and the like). Specifically, for example, it is determined whether or not an invalid period passage command (see S2403) has been received from the main control board 80, and when the invalid period passage command is received, a specific area error notification process is performed.

As the specific area error notification process, first, a specific area abnormal passage notification command that specifies execution of a display indicating that a specific area abnormal passage (specific area error) has occurred is set in the output buffer of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. .. When the set specific area abnormal passage notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 notifies that the specific area abnormal passage (specific area error) has occurred. The image data for this purpose is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the specific area abnormality passage notification (also referred to as “specific area error notification”) based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. The specific area error notification is performed, for example, by displaying a message (character image) of "error / V area abnormal passage" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This message display is performed from the occurrence of the abnormal passage of the specific area (start of message display) until a predetermined display time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, and ends when the display time elapses. The display patterns such as the display time and contents of the message display as a specific area error notification are not limited to those shown in this embodiment, and other characters (messages) may be displayed, and figures, symbols, etc. may be displayed in addition to the characters. It is possible to take various modes that appeal to the visual and auditory senses of the player and those involved in the game hall, such as displaying a display and outputting a sound effect.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates lamp data for lighting the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) in red as a specific area error notification process. When the created lamp data is output by the lamp data output process (S4202), the lamp control board 107 controls the frame lamp 66 according to the lamp data, whereby the frame lamp 66 lights up in red. That is, the frame lamp 66 is turned on in red as a specific area error notification by the frame lamp 66. The red lighting of the frame lamp 66 is performed from the occurrence of the abnormal passage in the specific area until a predetermined lighting time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses, and ends when the lighting time elapses. The lighting (light emission) pattern such as the lighting time and lighting color of the frame lamp 66 as a specific area error notification is not limited to this embodiment, and other lighting times and lighting colors can be adopted. Yes, it is also possible to make it blink instead of lighting.

Here, in this embodiment, the notification time (message display time) of the specific area abnormal passage by the image display device 7 is shorter than the notification time (frame lamp lighting time) of the specific area abnormal passage by the frame lamp 66. The former is supposed to end before the latter. This is because the game can proceed even if an abnormal passage in a specific area occurs, and the effect display related to the game effect such as the big hit game effect or the variable effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This is to prevent the visual recognition from being hindered for a long time by the specific area error notification (message display). On the other hand, since the specific area error notification by the frame lamp 66 has a small influence on the effect display related to such a game effect, it is decided that the specific area error notification is performed in a longer time than the specific area error notification by the image display device 7, and the specific area abnormality passage is performed. This is so that a third party (such as a person involved in the game hall) can easily recognize the occurrence.

Further, in the S4420, it is determined whether or not the first error notification command has been received from the main control board 80, and when the first error notification command is received, the above-mentioned first error notification (“V attacker mismatch” by the image display device 7) "Error" message is displayed, the frame lamp 66 is lit in red, and the error notification sound is output from the speaker 67). In the message display of "V attacker mismatch error", a command (first error message display command) for designating the display of the character image (first error character image) of the message is transmitted from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100. This is executed by the display control of the image control microcomputer 101. The red lighting of the frame lamp 66 is executed by the lighting control of the lamp control board 107 by outputting the lamp data for lighting the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) in red by the lamp data output process (S4202). The error notification sound output from the speaker 67 is executed by the sound output control of the voice control board 106 by outputting the sound data of the error notification sound (drive data of the speaker 67) by the drive data output process (S4203). To. The mode of the first error notification, such as the content of the message displayed as the first error notification and the lighting pattern of the lamp, is not limited to this embodiment, and the occurrence of the first error is caused by the player or the person involved in the game hall. As long as it can be recognized through sight, hearing, etc., the mode does not matter.

Further, in the S4420, it is determined whether or not the second error notification command has been received from the main control board 80, and when the second error notification command is received, the above-mentioned second error notification (“V attacker abnormality” by the image display device 7) Displaying the message "Discharge error" and lighting the frame lamp 66 in blue) is executed. In the message display of "V attacker abnormal discharge error", a command (second error message display command) for specifying the display of the character image (second error character image) of the message is transmitted from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100. By doing so, it is executed by the display control of the image control microcomputer 101. The blue lighting of the frame lamp 66 is executed by the lighting control of the lamp control board 107 by outputting the lamp data for lighting the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) in blue by the lamp data output process (S4202). The mode of the second error notification, such as the content of the message displayed as the second error notification and the lighting pattern of the lamp, is not limited to this embodiment, and the occurrence of the second error is caused by the player or the person involved in the game hall. As long as it can be recognized through sight, hearing, etc., the mode does not matter.

[Variable staging start processing]
Next, the variation effect start process (S4402) performed based on the reception of the variation start command in the receive command analysis process (S4302) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 46, in the variation effect start process (S4402), first, in S4501, the effect control microcomputer 91 uses a random number for determining a variation effect, a random number for determining a preview effect, a random number for determining an effect symbol, a random number for determining a specific effect, and the like. Performs random number processing for staging (S4501) to acquire random numbers for determining various staging. In this embodiment, the processing of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired values, the mode of the effect symbol game effect to be executed, the advance notice effect, the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined.

Next, in S4502, the fluctuation start command is analyzed by the effect control microcomputer 91 (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information for designating a variation pattern) that specifies a variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The information for designating the variation pattern includes the variation pattern information (P1 to P22) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current gaming state, the first special symbol hit / miss determination or the second special symbol hit / fail determination. The determination result of the above, the symbol information for designating the jackpot type, and the like are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are one corresponding to the first special symbol and the other corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern designation command, the effect symbol game effect to be started this time is performed by analyzing the variation pattern specification command. It is possible to determine whether the (variable display of the staging symbol) is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. It should be noted that these fluctuation pattern information, game state information, symbol information, and the like can also be used in processing other than the variation production start processing to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status of this embodiment is any value from "1" to "4", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to D. Specifically, the mode status "1" corresponds to the effect mode A, the mode status "2" corresponds to the effect mode B, the mode status "3" corresponds to the effect mode C, and the mode status "4" corresponds to the effect mode C. Corresponds to the production mode D. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

Here, the effect mode is a format of an effect when a variable effect (an effect associated with a variable display of a special symbol) is executed, and mainly determines the mode of the effect in the image display device 7. When the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect modes of the game effect such as the advance notice effect and the reach effect are different. Specifically, the images displayed on the image display device 7 are different, such as different characters, items, and background images, and the effect symbol game effect can also be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode. Further, when a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects may be executed depending on the effect mode.

In this embodiment, the effect mode A (mode status "1") and the effect mode B (mode status "2") are executed when the low accuracy and low base state is controlled, and the effect mode C (mode status "3") is executed. ") Is executed when the game is controlled to the low accuracy high base state (time saving game state), and the effect mode D (mode status" 4 ") is controlled to the high accuracy high base state (probability variable game state). Is executed. Therefore, by confirming which of A to D is the effect mode, the player can determine the current gaming state.

In addition to the effect modes A to D, the effect mode can be executed in both the case where the game state after the big hit game is controlled to the low accuracy and high base state and the case where the game state is controlled to the high accuracy and high base state. May be provided. The effect mode that can be executed between the low accuracy and high base state and the high accuracy and high base state is an effect mode in which it is difficult (impossible) for the player to determine the current gaming state through the effect. Such an effect mode is also referred to as a "state non-notification mode". In the state non-notification mode, it is not possible to know (apparently) whether or not the game is in the high probability state, so it is possible to prompt the player to guess whether or not the current game state is in the high probability state. By this. It is possible to enhance the interest.

Next, in S4504, a variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining an execution pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by using the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like is set (S4504). Specifically, the variation effect pattern determination table to be used is set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern specification command received from the main control unit 80.

For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), the variation effect pattern determination table is used as the variation effect pattern determination table, and the jackpot variation effect corresponding to the current effect mode is used. The pattern determination table is set. In this embodiment, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status) are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. Therefore, in the S4504, the variable effect pattern determination tables are selected from among them. The table corresponding to the mode status (current production mode) referenced in S4503 is selected and set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode (variable mode of the effect symbol, etc.) of the effect symbol game effect, and a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables are stored in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Has been done. In S4504, one of the plurality of variable staging pattern determination tables is set.

Next, in S4505, a variation effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected and set based on the variation effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504 (S4505). As the variation effect pattern, a variation mode of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) is set. As a result, in the staging symbol game effect, when the reach effect is executed (the effect pattern game effect with reach) and when the character effect performed using a specific character is executed (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect and It is determined that the character effect is not executed (the effect pattern game effect without reach).

In the reach effect, for example, as a display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (doublet). (Big hit mode, specific display mode), two of the three staging symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) by the symbols constituting the big hit mode, and the remaining 1 This refers to an effect indicating whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol that completes the jackpot mode while the individual pieces continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, in S4505, the effect symbol 8 (also referred to as “stop effect symbol”) to be stopped and displayed is determined and set based on the effect symbol determination random number acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown). Staging symbol The staging symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the game staging is roughly classified into a jackpot staging symbol corresponding to a jackpot and a deviating staging symbol corresponding to a miss. Among them, the jackpot effect symbol is, for example, an odd numbered symbol such as "777" when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is 7R 1st jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot and 15R 4th jackpot (that is, a jackpot scheduled to pass V). It is a doublet (big hit mode, specific display mode), and in the case of 7R 2nd big hit and 15R 5th big hit (that is, a big hit scheduled to not pass V), doublet numbers such as "666" (big hit mode, specific display mode). ). In addition, as for the out-of-reach effect design, for example, in the case of out-of-reach, one of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787" is different from the other effect symbols (reach out-of-reach). (Eyes), and when there is no reach, at least one of the three staging symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "635" is regarded as a different staging symbol from the other staging symbols. It should be noted that the stop display mode of these effect symbols 8 is an example, and what is stopped and displayed as the stop effect symbol when a big hit occurs can be appropriately changed.

Here, the jackpot symbol of the special symbol displayed (stopped display) in the case of the V non-passing scheduled jackpot and the jackpot effect symbol of the effect symbol 8 are referred to as "V non-passing scheduled jackpot symbol" and "first specific display mode". "Or" 1st specific display result ", the jackpot symbol of the special symbol displayed (stopped display) in the case of the jackpot scheduled to pass V or the jackpot effect symbol of the effect symbol 8 is the" jackpot symbol scheduled to pass V ". , Also referred to as "second specific display mode" or "second specific display result".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the variation mode (variation effect pattern) of the effect symbol 8, reach A, reach B, reach C, super reach (also referred to as “SP reach”) A, super reach B, and super Reach C, character effect, etc. are set. In the S4505, which of these effects is to be performed or which of these effects is not to be performed (this is also referred to as "normal variation") is determined based on the variation effect pattern determination table. Then, when the variation effect with reach is executed, one of the reach effects is set based on the variation pattern designation command and the variation effect pattern determination table. Here, when the super reach effect is executed as the variable effect, the possibility of a big hit is higher than when the normal reach effect (reach A to C) is executed. That is, it can be said that the super reach effect is a game effect with higher reliability (possibility of becoming a big hit) than the normal reach effect. The reach effect can be mainly set (executed) when a variation pattern designation command for specifying a variation pattern (see FIG. 9) having a variation time of 30,000 ms or more is received. In the S4505, a variable effect pattern corresponding to any of various variable effects including such a reach effect is set in response to the processing results of S4501 to S4504.

Next, in S4506, a variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect or the like based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 is set in the output buffer of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4506). The variable staging start process ends with the process of the S4506.

When the variation effect start command set in S4506 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 uses the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. Predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in 1 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and variation effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Big hit history information processing]
Next, the jackpot history information processing (S4305) executed by the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the jackpot history information processing (S4305), first, it is determined whether or not the opening command is received from the main control board 80 (S4601). As described above, the opening command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 at the start of the big hit game, and corresponds to the type of big hit such as the 7R 1st big hit opening command and the 7R 2nd big hit opening command. It is provided.

If it is determined that the opening command has not been received by S4601 (NO in S4601), the process proceeds to S4603 described later, and if it is determined that the opening command has been received (YES in S4601), based on the received opening command. , The type of the newly generated jackpot is specified, and the jackpot history information including the information based on the jackpot type (big hit type information) is stored in the history information storage area (S4602).

In the history information storage area, every time a big hit occurs (starts), information about the big hit game (big hit history information) is stored up to a predetermined number of big hits. For example, when the upper limit is 10 big hits, information about the latest 10 big hit games is stored. Then, when a new jackpot occurs (when an opening command is received) while information (big hit history information) related to the jackpot game for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) is stored in the history information storage area, the history. The oldest information among the jackpot history information stored in the information storage area is deleted (deleted), and the jackpot history information corresponding to the newly generated jackpot is stored.

Next, the S4603 determines whether or not a passage status designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4603). As described above, the passage status specification commands include an irregular V passage specification command (first passage status specification command), a normal V passage specification command (second passage status specification command), and an irregular V non-pass specification command. There are a total of four types, a (third passage status designation command) and a normal V non-passage designation command (fourth passage status designation command). The S4603 determines whether or not any of these four types of commands has been received.

If it is determined that the passage status specification command has not been received by S4603 (NO in S4603), the process shifts to the processing of S4605 described later, and if it is determined that the passage status specification command has been received (YES in S4603), the received passage has been performed. Based on the status specification command, the current V-passing or V-non-passing occurrence status (also referred to as "V-passing status") is specified, and the information based on the V-passing status (V-passing information) is provided in the previous S4602. It is stored in the history information storage area by adding it to the stored jackpot history information (S4604). That is, the contents of the jackpot history information having the newest storage order among the jackpot history information stored in the history information storage area are updated (here, V passage information is added) (S4604).

Here, the opening command is transmitted from the main control board 80 at the start of the big hit game, and the passage status specification command indicates that V passage has occurred in the V round or that the V round has ended without V passage. However, the opening command and the passing status specification command are both transmitted only once per big hit game, and the opening command and the passing status specification command are sent in the order of transmission of the opening command first and the passing status specification command. Will be later. That is, the jackpot game that triggers the transmission of the open command determined to be received by the S4601 and the jackpot game that triggers the transmission of the passage status specification command determined to be received by the S4603 are the same. Therefore, in the S4604, the jackpot history information having the latest storage order among the jackpot history information stored in the history information storage area is updated by adding the V passage information to the jackpot history information stored in the previous S4602. It is.

Next, in S4605, it is determined whether or not there is an instruction input (also referred to as "history display instruction input") for displaying the jackpot history information on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (S4605). The history display instruction input is performed by the person involved in the game hall operating the operation means such as the effect button 63, and the operation mode (method of inputting the history display instruction) of the operation means corresponding to the history display instruction input is. It is a mode that the player cannot know. This is because the jackpot history information of this embodiment is, in principle, information presented based on instructions from those involved in the game hall. Therefore, it is basically impossible for the player to input the history display instruction.

The operation mode of the history display instruction input is, for example, an operation lever while pressing the first effect button 63a in a state where the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is not performed (also referred to as “standby state”). Is tilted in the first predetermined direction (for example, to the left) a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) and then tilted in the second predetermined direction (for example, downward) a predetermined number of times (for example, five times), or the first effect button 63a is pressed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to guess, such as an operation of rotating the second effect button 63b leftward and rightward a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) after pressing the button a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times).

If it is determined that there is no history display instruction input in S4605 (NO in S4605), this process is completed as it is, and if it is determined that there is a history display instruction input (YES in S4605), the jackpot stored in the history information storage area The history display data is generated based on the history information, and the history display command instructing the display of the history display data is set in the output buffer of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4606). When the set history display command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays a history screen based on the history display data specified based on the history display command as an image display device. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. An example of the history screen is shown in FIG. In the following, a case where the jackpot history information can be stored up to the upper limit of 10 jackpots will be described as an example.

As shown in FIG. 51, the history screen 700 has a screen configuration for displaying information on the jackpot type and the V passing status for the last 10 jackpot games in a list format. The figure shows a case where the jackpot history information (10 jackpot history information) for 10 jackpots is stored in the history information storage area.

Of "No. 1 to No. 10" on the history screen 700, No. 10 corresponds to the latest jackpot history information, and the following is No. 9, No. It becomes older in the order of 8 ..., and No. 1 corresponds to the oldest jackpot history information.

Of the "big hit types" on the history screen 700, "probability change" indicates that the jackpot is scheduled to pass through V, and "non-probability variation" indicates that the jackpot is scheduled to pass through V. As described above, the V-passing planned jackpot is substantially a probabilistic jackpot, and the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is substantially a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot). It is to be shown by.

Of the "V passage status" on the history screen 700, "OK" means that no irregular event (irregular V passage or irregular V non-pass) occurred in the V round (V round was normally digested). That is, the jackpot game was performed normally), and "NG" indicates that an irregular event (irregular V passing or irregular V non-passing) occurred in the V round (abnormality in the V round). It indicates that it has occurred, that is, the jackpot game has not been performed normally).

For example, No. 1 in the history screen 700. When the jackpot type is "probability change" and the V passage status is "OK" (display of "probability change + OK") as in 1, V pass occurs in the V round of the jackpot game related to the V pass scheduled jackpot (normal). V pass), which means that the V round was normally digested.

In addition, No. 1 in the history screen 700. When the jackpot type is "non-probability" and the V-passage status is "OK" (display of "non-probability + OK") as in 3, V-passage occurs in the V-round of the jackpot game related to the V-non-passage scheduled jackpot. It means that the V round was normally digested without passing (normal V not passed).

In addition, No. 1 in the history screen 700. When the jackpot type is "probability change" and the V passage status is "NG" (display of "probability change + NG") as in 4, V passage does not occur in the V round of the jackpot game related to the V pass scheduled jackpot (display of "probability change + NG"). Irregular V non-passage), which means that the V round was not digested normally (an abnormality occurred in the V round).

In addition, No. 1 in the history screen 700. When the jackpot type is "non-probability" and the V-passage status is "NG" (display of "non-probability + NG") as in 8, V-passage occurs in the V-round of the jackpot game related to the V-non-passage scheduled jackpot. (Irregular V passage), which means that the V round was not digested normally (an abnormality occurred in the V round).

In this way, by displaying the history screen 700 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whether or not an irregular event has occurred in the executed jackpot game (V round) (V passage status) and a. It is possible to notify the type of irregularity (passing irregular V or not passing irregular V) when a regular event occurs. Therefore, the persons involved in the game hall can postpone the implementation status (V passage status) of the jackpot game (V round) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the history screen 700 displayed on the display screen 7a of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It will be possible to confirm. If the player is in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when displaying the history screen 700, the player also confirms the implementation status (V passage status) of the jackpot game (V round) together with the persons involved in the game hall. be able to.

For example, among the history screens 700 shown in FIG. 51, No. 8 to No. When the combination of "non-probability change" and "NG" is continuous as in 10, it means that irregular V passages occur in quick succession in three consecutive big hit games, which means that V passages (V passages ( It can be determined that there is a possibility of fraudulent activity that intentionally causes (erroneous detection) of the game ball detection by the specific area detection switch 39a. Also, for example, No. When there is a combination of "probability change" and "NG" as in 4, it can be determined that some trouble may have occurred in the specific area detection switch 39a or the launching device 112. In this way, by making it possible to confirm the execution status (V passage status) of the jackpot game after the fact through the history screen 700, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts and malfunctions of the gaming machine 1 at an early stage.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51, No. 1 to No. When all 10 are filled (10 jackpot history information is stored), every time a jackpot occurs thereafter, No. The information corresponding to No. 1 is deleted, and No. 1 is deleted. 2-No. The information corresponding to 10 is moved down by one, and the information corresponding to the newly generated jackpot is No. Displayed at 10. Therefore, whether or not an irregular event has occurred in the one jackpot game (V round) between the execution of one jackpot game and the execution of ten jackpot games (V passage status). ) Can be notified.

Here, the display of the V passage status on the history screen 700 is also referred to as "V passage status notification" or "predetermined notification", and the combination display of the jackpot type "non-probability change" and the V passage status "NG" on the history screen 700 ("non"). The display of "probability change + NG") is also called "irregular V passage occurrence notification" or "first predetermined notification", and the combination display of the jackpot type "probability change" and V passage status "OK" on the history screen 700 ("probability change + OK"). The display) is also referred to as "normal V passage occurrence notification" or "second predetermined notification", and the combination display (display of "probability change + NG") of the jackpot type "probability change" and the V passage status "NG" on the history screen 700 is "a". Also called "regular V non-passage occurrence notification" or "third predetermined notification", the combination display (display of "non-probability change + OK") of the jackpot type "non-probability change" and V passage status "OK" on the history screen 700 is "normal V". Also referred to as "non-passage occurrence notification" or "fourth predetermined notification". Further, the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) and the image control unit 100 that control the display of the history screen 700 are also referred to as “predetermined notification execution means”.

[Action and effect of Example 1]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is movable in the V round of the jackpot game related to the jackpot scheduled to pass through V (during a special game in which the gaming ball can enter the special entrance). When the piece 150 (distribution means) does not operate in the second operating mode but operates in the first operating mode and irregular V passage (first passing situation) in which the gaming ball passes through the specific area 39 occurs, the a. For a predetermined period after the occurrence of the regular V passage, the irregular V passage occurrence notification (first predetermined notification) for notifying the occurrence of the irregular V passage can be executed. Specifically, after the end of the jackpot game in which the irregular V passage occurs, until the jackpot game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the history screen 700 is displayed based on the history display instruction input. It is possible to notify the occurrence of irregular V passage.

In addition, in the V round of the jackpot game related to the jackpot scheduled to pass through V (during the special game in which the game ball can enter the special entrance), the movable piece 150 (distribution means) is the second operating mode. When the normal V passage (second passage status) that operates and the game ball passes through the specific area 39 occurs, the normal V passage that notifies the occurrence of the normal V passage for a predetermined period after the normal V passage occurs. Occurrence notification (second predetermined notification) can be executed. Specifically, after the end of the big hit game in which the normal V passage has occurred, until the big hit game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the history screen 700 is displayed based on the history display instruction input to be normal. It is possible to notify the occurrence of V passage.

Therefore, during the predetermined period after the irregular V passage (first passage status) or the normal V passage (second passage status) occurs, the game hall related persons, etc., pass through the irregular V passage or the normal through the history screen 700. It is possible to confirm the occurrence of V passage. Here, irregular V passage is a situation in which the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in a V round in which the possibility that the game ball is distributed to the specific area 39 is relatively low, and it can be said that it is not a normal V passage situation. On the other hand, the normal V passage is a situation in which the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in a V round in which the possibility that the game ball is distributed to the specific area 39 is relatively high, and can be said to be a normal V passage situation. This makes it possible to confirm through the history screen 700 whether or not the passage is a normal V passage when the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the executed big hit game.

In particular, in this embodiment, the contents of the jackpot history displayed by the history screen 700 are roughly classified into "big hit type" and "V passage status", all of which are "probable change", "non-probable change", "OK", and "OK". The content is directly expressed by characters, such as "NG". In addition, the jackpot type and V passing status for a plurality of jackpot games are displayed in a list format. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand the situation of the big hit game that has been executed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, not only irregular V passage (first passage status) and normal V passage (second passage status) but also irregular V non-passage (third passage status) and normal V passage (Fourth passage status) can also be notified by displaying the history screen 700. Thereby, it is possible to confirm the V passing status related to the executed big hit game in more detail through the history screen 700.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment controls the operation of the movable piece 150 based on the number of balls entered into the second big winning opening 35 (V attacker) in the V round, and the V passing big hit and the V Since the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 (V attacker) in the V round is the same as that of the non-passing big hit, the type of big hit (V) is based on the movement (opening pattern) of the second big winning opening 35 (V attacker). It is difficult to determine the planned passage jackpot or the V non-passage scheduled jackpot). In this respect, as in this embodiment, making it possible to confirm the V passing status related to the executed big hit game after the fact through the history screen 700 means that the type of the generated big hit can be confirmed after the fact. Therefore, it is useful for a gaming machine of a type that controls the operation of the movable piece 150 based on the number of balls entered into the second large winning opening 35 (V attacker).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first special symbol hit / miss determination (first determination) executed based on the detection of the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 (first determination entry slot) is performed. The result or the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination (second determination) executed based on the detection of the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 (second determination entry opening) is a big hit (specific result). In this case, when the jackpot game (special game) is executed, the hit indicator 48 notifies whether the execution trigger of the jackpot game is the first special symbol hit / miss judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. At least, it can be executed in a predetermined period after the irregular V passage (first passage situation) occurs.

Therefore, when an irregular V passage that is not a normal V passage condition occurs, the game hall officials and the like determine that the jackpot game when the irregular V passage (first passage condition) occurs is the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. It is possible to confirm after the fact through the hit indicator 48 which of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. This makes it possible to confirm the state of the game in more detail when the irregular V passage occurs.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, not only the irregular V passage (first passage status) but also the normal V passage (second passage status), the irregular V non-passage (third passage status), and the normal V passage Regardless of which of the (fourth passage status) occurs, the determination notification by the hit indicator 48 can be executed in a predetermined period after the occurrence. Therefore, it is determined whether the execution trigger of the big hit game in which an irregular event occurs or the big hit game in which an irregular event does not occur is the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. It is possible to confirm after the fact through the hit indicator 48. This makes it possible to confirm the game situation in more detail when each passing situation occurs.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the V passage notification effect (passage effect) can be executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area 39 during the big hit game (during the V round), which is irregular. When V-passage (first passage status) occurs, the V-passage notification effect based on the irregular V-passage is not executed, and when normal V-passage (second passage status) occurs, the normal V-passage is performed. The V-passage notification effect based on the passage is executed. Therefore, for irregular V passage (first passage condition) that is not a normal V passage condition, the occurrence of the game ball passage to the specific area 39 is not appealed, while the normal V passage condition that is a normal V passage condition is the first normal V. Regarding the passage (second passage situation), it is possible to appeal the occurrence of the game ball passage to the specific area 39. This makes it possible to appropriately produce the passing of the game ball (passing V) to the specific area 39.

In the first embodiment, the history screen 700 is displayed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) based on the history display instruction input using the effect button or the like in the standby state to notify the V passage status. However, the timing of the notification (V passage status notification timing) is not limited to this embodiment, and the V passage status is notified without an external instruction input such as a history display instruction input. Is also possible.

For example, when V passage occurs during a jackpot game related to a jackpot scheduled to not pass through V (that is, when irregular V passage occurs), irregular V in the jackpot game is performed in a predetermined period after the occurrence of V passage. Irregular V passage occurrence notification may be performed by automatically (forced) displaying characters (messages) or the like for notifying the occurrence of passage on the display screen 7a. In addition, when V passage occurs during the jackpot game related to the V passage scheduled jackpot (that is, when normal V passage occurs), normal V passage occurs in the jackpot game in a predetermined period after the V passage occurs. By automatically (forcibly) displaying a character (message) or the like for notifying the above on the display screen 7a, the normal V passage occurrence notification may be performed.

In this way, when the V passage status is notified without inputting an instruction from the outside, the notification shall be performed for the latest one big hit, and the notification shall be given for each execution of the big hit game (occurrence of big hit). The content is configured to be switched (changed) according to the implementation status of the jackpot game (big hit type, V passing status). This is to prevent the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) from interfering with the effect display such as the variable effect executed.

In addition, the execution period (predetermined period) of the notification when the V passage status is notified without inputting an instruction from the outside is, for example, the period from the occurrence of irregular V passage to the occurrence of the next big hit. , The period from the occurrence of normal V passage to the occurrence of the next big hit, the period from the transition to the high probability state (after the end of the jackpot game) to the occurrence of the next jackpot, or the transition to the high probability state (the jackpot) It is possible to set the period from (after the end of the game) to the end of the high probability state by executing the variable display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

In the configuration according to the above alternative example, even if there is no external instruction input such as the history display instruction input, the irregular V passage occurrence notification and the normal V passage occurrence notification are displayed on the display screen 7a over a predetermined period. It is possible to confirm the occurrence of irregular V passage or normal V passage at any time during a predetermined period. The same applies to irregular V non-passage and normal V non-passage.

Further, the configuration related to the notification of the V passing status of the first embodiment includes a specific area (V area) in the large winning opening that enables entry when the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is a small hit, and the small hit. A type of pachinko gaming machine (so-called "1 type 2 type mixer") in which a big hit game is executed when a game ball that has entered the big winning opening during a game passes through a specific area (passes V). ") Is also applicable.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. This embodiment is characterized by the transition of the effect mode in which the variation effect (effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol) is executed. Hereinafter, the configuration of this embodiment will be mainly described with respect to the parts different from those of the first embodiment, and the description of the common parts (configuration, action and effect, etc.) with the first embodiment will be omitted.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a "V certain machine" as in the first embodiment, but in the following, irregular events (irregular V passing, irregular V non-passing) in the V round during the big hit game. Passage) does not occur.

In the first embodiment described above, it has been described that the staging modes A, B, C, and D (mode statuses “1” to “4”) are provided. On the other hand, this embodiment includes three effect modes X, Y, and Z. Further, the mode status of this embodiment is set to any value from "1" to "3", the mode status "1" corresponds to the effect mode X, and the mode status "2" corresponds to the effect mode Y. , The mode status "3" corresponds to the effect mode Z.

The staging modes X, Y, and Z are different from each other in part or all of the design of the staging pattern (shape, pattern, color, etc.), the mode of the variable staging such as the reach staging and the preview staging (staging configuration). To.

Here, the staging mode X is also referred to as a “normal staging mode” or a “first staging mode”, and the staging mode Y is also referred to as a “predetermined staging mode” or a “second staging mode”, which is a staging mode Z. Is also referred to as a "specific effect mode" or a "third effect mode".

The effect mode X corresponds to the low probability low base state (low probability state, first game state), the effect mode Y corresponds to the low probability high base state (low probability state, first game state), and the effect mode Z corresponds to the effect mode Z. Corresponds to a high probability high base state (high probability state, second game state). In addition, the effect mode Z may also correspond to a low probability high base state (low probability state, first game state).

Therefore, the combinations of the gaming state and the effect mode that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can take are (1) "low accuracy low base state and effect mode X", and (2) "low accuracy high base state and effect mode". There are four patterns: "Y", (3) "high accuracy high base state and effect mode Z", and (4) "low accuracy high base state and effect mode Z".

When paying attention to the relationship between the presence / absence of operation of the probability fluctuation function (low probability state, high probability state) and the effect mode, (1) "low probability state (first game state) and first effect mode", (2). ) "Low probability state (first game state) and second effect mode", (3) "High probability state (second game state) and third effect mode" and (4) "Low probability state (first game state)" ) And the third effect mode ”.

In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control unit 90 executes the effect mode control for realizing each of the above patterns. Hereinafter, the effect mode control process (S5000) of the present embodiment executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54.

[Production mode control process]
As shown in FIG. 52, in the effect mode control process (S5000), first, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (S5001). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (NO in S5001), the process shifts to the processing of S5010 (see FIG. 54), and when it is determined that the ending command has been received (YES in S5001), the processing of S5002. Move to. In this embodiment, when the ending command is received, the above-mentioned ending effect selection process (S4411) is performed, and the processes after S5002 are performed.

In the S5002, whether or not the jackpot corresponding to the ending command received in the S5001, that is, the jackpot that triggered the execution (start) of the jackpot game that ends this time (this jackpot) is the jackpot that occurred in the production mode X. Is determined (S5002).

Here, in the sub-control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) of the present embodiment, when the big hit occurs even after the big hit game related to the big hit becomes a big hit as a result of the special symbol hit / miss determination. It is configured to maintain the value of the mode status of. That is, it is possible to memorize the effect mode when a big hit occurs. Therefore, in the S5002, the effect mode when a big hit occurs can be specified by referring to the value of the mode status when the ending command is received.

As described in the first embodiment, the ending command is set based on the game state at the time of a big hit, the big hit type information, and the ON / OFF of the V flag. Therefore, we decided to include the information indicating the game state (game state information) at the time of the big hit in the ending command, and by analyzing the ending command received by the S5001 to specify the game state when the big hit occurred, the S5002 Judgment can also be made.

When the S5002 determines that the jackpot this time is not the jackpot that occurred in the effect mode X (NO in the S5002), that is, it occurred in the low probability low base state and the effect mode X (first game state and first effect mode). If it is not a big hit, the process proceeds to S5006 (see FIG. 53).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit this time is the big hit generated in the effect mode X (YES in S5002), that is, it occurred in the low probability low base state and the effect mode X (first game state and first effect mode). If it is a big hit, move to the processing of S5003. It should be noted that the low probability low base state is a normal (initial) gaming state in which the first special symbol hit / miss judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) is mainly performed in a situation where the probability fluctuation function does not operate. The big hit that occurs in the game state corresponds to the so-called "first hit".

In S5003, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 39 (whether or not V passage has occurred) in the big hit game (V round) related to the current big hit (S5003). As described above, the ending command is set based on the ON / OFF of the V flag. Therefore, for example, information indicating ON / OFF of the V flag (V flag information) is included in the ending command, and the ending command received by the S5001 is analyzed to specify the ON / OFF of the V flag. Judgment can be made. In addition to this, for example, the determination of S5003 can be made based on whether or not a specific area passing command is received (see S4412) in the jackpot game that ends this time.

If it is determined by S5003 that V passage has not occurred (NO in S5003), the mode status is set to "2" (S5004), and this process ends. In this case, the game state and the effect mode after the big hit game this time are the low accuracy and high base state and the effect mode Y (the first game state and the second effect mode).

On the other hand, when it is determined that V passage has occurred in S5003 (YES in S5003), the mode status is set to "3" (S5005), and this process ends. In this case, the game state and the effect mode after the big hit game this time are the high accuracy and high base state and the effect mode Z (second game state and third effect mode).

In this way, when V passage does not occur in the big hit game related to the first hit (big hit generated in the effect mode X) (NO in S5003), the game state after the big hit game is the low accuracy high base state (first). When the effect mode is set to "Y" (S5004) and V passage occurs in the big hit game related to the first hit (YES in S5003), the game state after the big hit game is highly accurate. The high base state (second game state) is set and the effect mode is set to "Z" (S5005). Therefore, the effect mode Z set after the big hit game related to the first hit, that is, the effect mode Z shifted from the effect mode X (low probability state) is in the probability variation game state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function is activated. This is an effect mode that deterministically indicates (notifies) that there is. Such an effect mode is also referred to as a "high probability state notification mode".

On the other hand, when it is determined in the above-mentioned S5002 that the jackpot this time is not the jackpot generated in the effect mode X (NO in S5002), as shown in FIG. 53, the jackpot this time is the jackpot generated in the effect mode Y. Determine if it exists (S5006). That is, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot that occurred in the low probability high base state and the effect mode Y (first game state and second effect mode). The determination of S5006 can be performed in the same manner as the determination of S5002.

When the S5006 determines that the jackpot this time is a jackpot that occurred in the effect mode Y (YES in the S5006), that is, it occurs in the low accuracy high base state and the effect mode Y (first game state and second effect mode). In the case of a big hit, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 39 (whether or not V passage has occurred) in the big hit game (V round) related to the current big hit (S5007). The determination of S5007 can be performed in the same manner as the determination of S5003.

If it is determined in S5007 that V passage has not occurred (NO in S5007), the mode status is set to "2" (S5008), and this process ends. In this case, the game state and the effect mode after the big hit game this time are the low accuracy and high base state and the effect mode Y (the first game state and the second effect mode). That is, the production mode Y is maintained (continued) before and after this big hit.

On the other hand, if it is determined that V passage has occurred in S5007 (YES in S5007) and if it is determined in S5006 that this jackpot is not the jackpot that occurred in the staging mode Y (NO in S5006), both are mode statuses. Is set to "3" (S5009), and this process is completed.

If the current jackpot is a jackpot that occurred in the effect mode Y, and V passage occurs during the jackpot game related to the jackpot (YES for S5006, YES for S5007), the game state and effect after the current jackpot game. The mode is a high-accuracy high-base state and an effect mode Z (second game state and third effect mode).

Further, when the current jackpot is not the jackpot generated in the effect mode Y (NO in S5006), that is, when the jackpot is the jackpot generated in the effect mode Z, the effect mode after the current jackpot game is the effect mode Z. That is, the effect mode Z is maintained (continued) before and after this big hit.

Here, if V passage occurs during the jackpot game, the effect mode after the jackpot game is always the effect mode Z (mode status "3") (YES → S5005 for S5003, YES → S5009 for S5007). That is, the game state and the effect mode after the big hit game are the high accuracy and high base state and the effect mode Z (the second game state and the third effect mode).

In addition, when a V non-passing jackpot (15R 5th jackpot) occurs in the high-accuracy high-base state and the staging mode Z, and the jackpot game related to the jackpot ends, the current jackpot occurs in the staging mode X in the S5002. It is determined that it is not a big hit (NO in S5002), it is determined in S5006 that this big hit is not a big hit generated in the production mode Y (NO in S5006), and the mode status is set to "3" (S5009). That is, the game state and the effect mode after the big hit game in this case are the low accuracy and high base state and the effect mode Z (the first game state and the third effect mode).

Therefore, it is determined in the S5006 that the jackpot is not the jackpot that occurred in the effect mode Y because the jackpot occurs in the highly accurate high base state and the effect mode Z (second game state and third effect mode). Either when the jackpot game ends or when a jackpot occurs in the low accuracy high base state and the effect mode Z (first game state and third effect mode) and the jackpot game related to the jackpot ends. Is.

Therefore, if a jackpot occurs in the effect mode Z after shifting to the effect mode Z after the jackpot game related to the jackpot in the low accuracy low base state (first hit) or the jackpot in the low accuracy high base state, the jackpot is concerned. Regardless of whether or not V passage occurs in the jackpot game, that is, regardless of whether the jackpot generated in the effect mode Z is a "V passage scheduled jackpot" or a "V non-passage scheduled jackpot", after the jackpot game Is again in the production mode Z. Therefore, after shifting from the effect mode X or the effect mode Y to the effect mode Z, when a big hit occurs repeatedly in the effect mode Z (in the case of the so-called "renso"), the effect mode Z (effect mode during the period of the consecutive villa) Z) is an effect mode in which it is uncertain (unknown) whether or not the probability fluctuation function is operating. That is, it is an effect mode (state non-notification mode) that does not notify whether or not the probability fluctuation function is operating.

In this embodiment, the staging mode Z set by the big hit (first hit) in the low probability low base state or the big hit in the low probability high base state becomes the high probability state notification mode, and during the consecutive villa period. In order to ensure the playability that the effect mode Z becomes the state non-notification mode when the jackpot is triggered, the jackpot mode (big hit effect symbol) of the effect symbol 8 composed of the numerical symbols of "1" to "9" is set. Different by.

Specifically, in the effect modes X and Y, the jackpot mode corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot is doublet with an odd number symbol, and the jackpot mode corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is doublet with an even-numbered symbol. It is possible to discriminate between the V-passing scheduled jackpot and the V-non-passing scheduled jackpot (type of the generated jackpot) through the jackpot mode of the effect symbol 8.

On the other hand, in the effect mode Z, both the jackpot mode corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (big hit effect symbol) and the jackpot mode corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (big hit effect symbol) are doublet numbers. Therefore, it is impossible to distinguish between the V-passing scheduled jackpot and the V-non-passing scheduled jackpot (type of the generated jackpot) through the jackpot mode of the effect symbol 8.

Next, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the above-mentioned S5001 (NO in S5001), it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode Y or the effect mode Z, as shown in FIG. 54. (S5010). This determination can be made by referring to the value of the current mode status.

When the S5010 determines that the current staging mode is neither the staging mode Y nor the staging mode Z (NO in the S5010), that is, when the current staging mode is the staging mode X (low probability low base state). This process is completed without performing the process after S5011.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5010 that the current effect mode is the effect mode Y or the effect mode Z (YES in S5010), it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation count counter is "0" (S5011). Here, the fluctuation count counter is provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90, and after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state (game state other than the low accuracy low base state). After that, the sub-control unit counts the number of executions (number of fluctuations) of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol 8) executed in the game state after the transition (variation count counting means).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the big hit game (with V passing) related to the V passing scheduled big hit (probability variable big hit) is completed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high accuracy high base state until the variation display of the special symbol is performed 100 times. After the end of the jackpot game (without passing V) related to the non-passing scheduled jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot), the low-accuracy high-base state is set until the variation display of the special symbol is performed 100 times. In response to this, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets "100" in the probability variation counter and the time reduction counter (S2203, S2207) when shifting to the high accuracy high base state, and the big hit game. When shifting to the low accuracy high base state later, set "100" to the time reduction counter (S2210). Then, every time the change display of the special symbol is performed thereafter, the value of each counter is subtracted by 1 (S1904, S1908).

The fluctuation count counter has the same function as the probability variation counter and the time reduction counter, and operates in synchronization with the probability variation counter and the time reduction counter. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets "100" in the variation counter at the end of the big hit game (transition of the game state), and thereafter, the variation counter is performed every time the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is performed. The value of is subtracted by 1. Therefore, when the value of the fluctuation count counter becomes "0" while the effect mode Y or the effect mode Z is set, the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state ends, and the effect mode Y is accompanied by this. Alternatively, the effect mode Z is also terminated.

When it is determined in S5011 that the value of the fluctuation count counter is not "0" (NO in S5011), this processing is completed without performing the processing of S5012, and when it is determined to be "0" (YES in S5011), the mode Set the status to "1" (S5012) and finish this process. As a result, the effect mode Y or the effect mode Z that has been set up to that point is terminated, and the effect mode X is set. That is, the subsequent game state and effect mode are the low probability low base state and the effect mode X (first game state and first effect mode).

The sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) that executes the above effect mode control process (S5000) functions as an “effect mode control means”.

Next, the transition of the staging mode realized by the staging mode control process (S5000) will be described with reference to FIG. 55. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reference gaming state is a "low probability low base state" in which the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function are not activated, and the standard effect corresponding to this gaming state is produced. The mode is "directing mode X".

[Direction mode X]
When a special symbol fluctuation display is performed in the effect mode X (low accuracy low base state) and a V non-passing scheduled jackpot occurs (when the first specific display result is derived), the effect is produced after the jackpot game related to the jackpot. The mode Y is entered, and the gaming state becomes the low accuracy high base state (see reference numeral X1).

In addition, when a special symbol variable display is performed in the effect mode X (low accuracy and low base state) and a V-passing scheduled jackpot occurs (when the second specific display result is derived), after the jackpot game related to the jackpot. The mode shifts to the effect mode Z, and the gaming state becomes the high-accuracy high-base state (see reference numeral X2).

[Direction mode Y]
When a special symbol fluctuation display is performed in the effect mode Y (low accuracy high base state) and a V non-passing scheduled jackpot occurs (when the first specific display result is derived), the jackpot game related to the jackpot is performed again. The effect mode Y is set, and the gaming state is again set to the low accuracy high base state (see reference numeral Y1). That is, the effect mode Y and the low accuracy high base state loop.

In addition, when a special symbol fluctuation display is performed in the effect mode Y (low accuracy high base state) and a V-passing scheduled jackpot occurs (when the second specific display result is derived), after the jackpot game related to the jackpot. The mode shifts to the effect mode Z, and the gaming state becomes the high-accuracy high-base state (see reference numeral Y2).

Furthermore, while the variation display of the special symbol is performed in the effect mode Y (low accuracy high base state), if the variation display is performed 100 times without the occurrence of a big hit (when the variation is displayed 100 times in a row), the 100 is said. At the end of the second variation display, the mode X shifts to the effect mode X, and the gaming state becomes the low probability low base state (see reference numeral Y3).

[Direction mode Z]
When a special symbol fluctuation display is performed in the effect mode Z (high accuracy and high base state) and a V non-passing scheduled jackpot occurs (when the first specific display result is derived), the jackpot game related to the jackpot is performed again. The effect mode Z is set, and the gaming state is set to the low accuracy and high base state (see reference numeral Z1). That is, while the effect mode Z loops, the gaming state shifts (falls) from the high accuracy high base state to the low accuracy high base state.

In addition, when a special symbol variable display is performed in the effect mode Z (high accuracy and high base state) and a V-passing scheduled jackpot occurs (when the second specific display result is derived), after the jackpot game related to the jackpot. The effect mode Z is set again, and the gaming state is set to the high accuracy and high base state again (see reference numeral Z2). That is, the effect mode Z and the high accuracy and high base state loop.

On the other hand, when a special symbol fluctuation display is performed in the effect mode Z (low accuracy high base state) and a V non-passing scheduled jackpot occurs (when the first specific display result is derived), the jackpot game related to the jackpot Later, the effect mode Z is set again, and the gaming state is changed to the low accuracy high base state again (see reference numeral Z3). That is, the effect mode Z and the low accuracy high base state loop.

In addition, when a special symbol fluctuation display is performed in the effect mode Z (low accuracy high base state) and a V-passing scheduled jackpot occurs (when the second specific display result is derived), after the jackpot game related to the jackpot. The effect mode Z is set again, and the gaming state is set to the high accuracy and high base state (see reference numeral Z4). That is, while the effect mode Z loops, the gaming state shifts (promotes) from the low accuracy high base state to the high accuracy high base state.

Furthermore, while the variation display of the special symbol is performed in the effect mode Z (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state), if the variation display is performed 100 times without a big hit, the variation display is performed 100 times (100 times in a row). Then, at the end of the 100th variation display, the mode X is set to the effect mode X, and the gaming state becomes the low probability low base state (see reference numerals Z5 and Z6).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transition of the staging mode between the staging modes X, Y, and Z is the case of shifting from the staging mode X to the staging mode Y and the staging mode X to the staging mode Z. There are cases of transition, transition from effect mode Y to effect mode Z, transition from effect mode Y to effect mode X, and transition from effect mode Z to effect mode X, and from effect mode Z. There is no transition to the production mode Y.

For this reason, the effect mode Z when a V-passage scheduled jackpot (first hit) occurs in the effect mode X and the effect mode Z is entered, and the effect mode Z occurs when the V-passage scheduled jackpot occurs in the effect mode Y and the process shifts to the effect mode Z. In that case, the effect mode Z, that is, the effect mode Z when the state shifts to the high probability state triggered by the big hit in the low probability state (the effect mode Z at the beginning of the transition to the high probability state) may be the high probability state. It becomes the production mode to be confirmed. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs in the effect mode Z, whether the game state is a high probability state (high probability high base state) or a low probability state (low probability low base state) after the big hit game related to the big hit. Regardless of the above, the effect mode Z is set (the effect mode Z loops). Therefore, it is uncertain (unknown) whether the effect mode Z (effect mode Z during the consecutive villa period) is a high-probability state or a low-probability state while the jackpot is repeatedly generated in the effect mode Z. Will be. As a result, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect mode Z, which has been shifted to the effect mode X or the effect mode Y as a trigger, has a high probability state, and the effect of looping with the effect mode Z as a trigger. The mode Z is provided with playability such that the high probability state is not confirmed.

[Action and effect of Example 2]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, when the gaming state is the low probability low base state (low probability state, the first gaming state) and the staging mode is the staging mode X (first staging mode). (1st gaming state and 1st staging mode) When a V non-passing scheduled jackpot occurs (when the 1st specific display result is derived), the gaming state after the jackpot game (after the special game) is low. The effect mode becomes the effect mode Y (second effect mode) at the same time as the high probability base state (low probability state, first game state) (first game state and second effect mode).

In addition, when a big hit scheduled to pass through V occurs (when the second specific display result is derived) in the low probability low base state and the effect mode X (first game state and first effect mode), the big hit game is triggered by this. After (after the special game), the game state becomes the high accuracy high base state (high probability state, the second game state), and the effect mode becomes the effect mode Z (third effect mode) (second game state and third). Production mode).

That is, when a big hit occurs in the low probability low base state and the effect mode X (the first game state and the first effect mode) (when the specific display result is derived), the big hit is the planned V passage jackpot (specific display result). Is the second specific display result), the mode shifts to the effect mode Z (third effect mode). The effect mode Z (third effect mode) in this case is an effect mode in which it is determined that the state is a high probability state (second game state).

On the other hand, when a V non-passing scheduled jackpot occurs (when the first specific display result is derived) in the high-probability high-base state and the effect mode Z (second game state and third effect mode), the jackpot is triggered by this. After the game (after the special game), the game state becomes the low probability high base state (low probability state, the first game state) and the effect mode becomes the effect mode Z (third effect mode) (first game state and first). 3 production mode).

Further, in the high-probability high-base state and the effect mode Z (the second game state and the third effect mode), a V-passing scheduled jackpot occurs (when the second specific display result is derived), and the jackpot game is triggered by this. After (after the special game), the game state becomes the high accuracy high base state (high probability state, the second game state), and the effect mode becomes the effect mode Z (third effect mode) (second game state and third). Production mode).

That is, when a big hit occurs in the effect mode Z (second game state and third effect mode) (when a specific display result is derived), the type of the big hit (specific display result) (in other words, after the special game). Regardless of the type of gaming state), the effect mode Z (third effect mode) is maintained. In this case, the effect mode Z (third effect mode) is an effect mode in which it is uncertain that the state is a high probability state (second game state) (whether or not it is a high probability state is unknown).

In this way, even in the same effect mode Z (third effect mode), the game state when a big hit that triggers the setting of the effect mode Z (third effect mode) occurs (a specific display result is derived). The meaning of the effect mode Z (third effect mode) differs depending on the effect mode. As a result, using the same effect mode Z (third effect mode), there is a sense of security that the high probability state (second game state) is confirmed, and whether or not the state is a high probability state (second game state). It is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement that the player does not know, and by extension, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, when a V non-passing scheduled jackpot occurs in the low probability high base state and the effect mode Z (first game state and third effect mode) (the first specific display result is derived). Then, with this as an opportunity, the game state after the big hit game (after the special game) becomes the low probability high base state (low probability state, the first game state), and the production mode becomes the production mode Z (third production mode). (1st game state and 3rd production mode).

In addition, when a large hit scheduled to pass through V occurs (when the second specific display result is derived) in the low probability high base state and the effect mode Z (first game state and third effect mode), the big hit game is triggered by this. After (after the special game), the game state becomes the high accuracy high base state (high probability state, the second game state), and the effect mode becomes the effect mode Z (third effect mode) (second game state and third). Production mode).

That is, when a big hit occurs in the low accuracy high base state and the effect mode Z (first game state and third effect mode) (when the specific display result is derived), the type of the big hit (specific display result) (in other words). Then, the effect mode Z (third effect mode) is maintained regardless of the type of game state after the special game. In this case, the effect mode Z (third effect mode) is an effect mode in which it is uncertain that the state is a high probability state (second game state) (whether or not it is a high probability state is unknown).

For this reason, as long as the production mode Z (third production mode) is once set and then the occurrence of big hits (derivation of the specific display result) is repeated in the production mode Z (third production mode) (so-called "renso"). , The player will proceed with the game in a situation where it is not known whether or not the player is in the high probability state (second game state). As a result, it is possible to further improve the game entertainment after the production mode Z (third production mode).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, when a V non-passing scheduled jackpot occurs in the low probability high base state and the effect mode Y (first game state and second effect mode) (the first specific display result is derived). Then, with this as an opportunity, the game state after the big hit game (after the special game) becomes the low probability high base state (low probability state, the first game state), and the production mode becomes the production mode Y (second production mode). (1st gaming state and 2nd staging mode).

In addition, when a V-passing scheduled jackpot occurs (when the second specific display result is derived) in the low probability high base state and the effect mode Y (first game state and second effect mode), the jackpot game is triggered by this. After (after the special game), the game state becomes the high accuracy high base state (high probability state, the second game state), and the effect mode becomes the effect mode Z (third effect mode) (second game state and third). Production mode).

That is, when a big hit occurs in the low probability high base state and the effect mode Y (the first game state and the second effect mode) (when the specific display result is derived), the big hit (specific display result) is scheduled to pass V. Only in the case of a big hit (second specific display result) (when the gaming state shifts from the low probability state to the high probability state), the effect mode Z (third effect mode) is entered.

Therefore, even when the effect mode Y (second effect mode) is changed to the effect mode Z (third effect mode), the effect mode Z (third effect mode) is in a high probability state (second game state). It becomes a production mode in which it is confirmed that there is. As a result, the player is given a sense of security that the high probability state (second game state) is confirmed when the effect mode Y (second effect mode) is changed to the effect mode Z (third effect mode). Is possible.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, in the low accuracy and high base state and the effect mode Z (first game state and third effect mode), no big hit occurs (specific display result is derived) 100 times. When the variation display of the special symbol (predetermined number of times) is executed, the effect mode Z (third effect mode) ends with the execution of the 100th variation display, and the effect mode X (first effect mode) is set. Transition. That is, it returns to the low probability low base state and the effect mode X (the first game state and the first effect mode).

Therefore, it is possible to clarify the end of the effect mode Z (third effect mode). As a result, it is possible to give the game a sharpness by preventing the game in the effect mode Z (third effect mode) from continuing unnecessarily.

In Example 2, a pachinko gaming machine (V probability machine) of a type that determines whether or not to give a high probability state based on the presence or absence of V passage during a big hit game (V round) has been described as an example. The configuration related to the effect mode control (effect mode transition) of the second embodiment is of a type that determines whether or not to give a high probability state based on the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (result of the jackpot type determination). It can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines (so-called "design probability change machines"). This is because the "V passing planned jackpot" and the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" substantially correspond to the "probability variation jackpot" and the "non-probability variation jackpot (normal jackpot)", respectively. In the case of the symbol probability change machine, the "non-probability change jackpot symbol (normal jackpot symbol) corresponds to the" first specific display result ", and the probability variation jackpot symbol corresponds to the" second specific display result ".

Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described. This embodiment is characterized by an effect performed on a specific entrance among a plurality of entrances provided in the game area 3. Hereinafter, the configuration of this embodiment will be mainly described with respect to parts different from those of Examples 1 and 2 described above, and description of parts common to Examples 1 and 2 (configuration, action and effect, etc.) will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the first prize-winning device 310 shown in FIGS. 56 to 58 is replaced with the first prize-winning device 31 and the second prize-winning device 36 (see FIGS. 3, 48, etc.) of the above-described embodiment. And the second big prize device 360 is provided. In this embodiment, the second big winning device 360 (the second big winning opening 35) is provided below the first big winning device 310 (the first big winning opening 300), and the second big winning device 360 (the second big winning opening) is provided. The two major winning openings 35) are smaller than the first major winning device 310 (first major winning opening 300).

The first prize-winning device 310 includes an opening / closing member 320, and opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 300 by operating the opening / closing member 320. The opening / closing member 320 has a horizontally long rectangular plate shape in a plan view, and is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid, so that the opening / closing member 320 is on the front side (game board surface side) from the surface (game area 3) of the game board 2. It is possible to move horizontally (in the front-back direction) between the state of protruding to the back and the state of retracting to the back side (the back side of the game board).

56 and 58 show a state in which the opening / closing member 320 protrudes toward the front side, and in this state, the first large winning opening 300 is in the closed state (first state). When the opening / closing member 320 is in a state of protruding toward the front side (the first big winning opening 300 is in the closed state), the place where the first big winning device 310 (the first big winning opening 300) is arranged by flowing down the right game area 3B. The game ball that has reached is rolled on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 320 along its inclination (downward inclination from right to left in this embodiment) without entering the first large winning opening 300.

On the other hand, FIG. 57 shows a state in which the opening / closing member 320 is retracted to the back side (see the portion represented by the broken line in FIG. 57), and in this state, the first large winning opening 300 is in the open state (the first large winning opening 300). 2 states). When the opening / closing member 320 is retracted to the back side (the first big winning opening 300 is in the open state), the opening / closing member 320 flows down the right game area 3B and the first big winning device 310 (the first big winning opening 300) is arranged. The game ball that has reached is entered into the first large winning opening 300.

In this way, the first large winning opening 300 is in an inaccessible state (closed state, first state) in which the game ball cannot enter due to the operation of the opening / closing member 320 (horizontal movement in the front-rear direction), and the game. It is configured as a variable entry port that can be changed to an entry-possible state (open state, second state) in which a ball can enter.

The second big winning device 360 includes an opening / closing member 370, and opens and closes the second big winning opening 350 by the operation of the opening / closing member 370. The opening / closing member 370 has a horizontally long rectangular plate shape in a plan view, and is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid so as to be on the front side (game board surface side) of the game board 2 surface (game area 3). It is possible to move horizontally (in the front-back direction) between the state of protruding to the back and the state of retracting to the back side (the back side of the game board). The opening / closing member 370 of this embodiment has a shorter dimension (horizontal dimension) in the left-right direction than the opening / closing member 320.

56 and 57 show a state in which the opening / closing member 370 protrudes toward the front side, and in this state, the second large winning opening 350 is in the closed state (first state). When the opening / closing member 370 is in a state of protruding toward the front side (the second big winning opening 350 is in the closed state), the place where the second big winning device 360 (the second big winning opening 350) is arranged by flowing down the right game area 3B. The game ball that has reached is rolled on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 370 along its inclination (downward inclination from right to left in this embodiment) without entering the second big winning opening 350.

On the other hand, FIG. 58 shows a state in which the opening / closing member 370 is retracted to the back side (see the portion represented by the broken line in FIG. 58), and in this state, the second large winning opening 350 is in the open state (the first). 2 states). When the opening / closing member 370 is retracted to the back side (the second big winning opening 350 is in the open state), it flows down the right game area 3B and the second big winning device 360 (the second big winning opening 350) is arranged. The game ball that has reached is entered into the second big winning opening 350.

In this way, the second large winning opening 350 is in an inaccessible state (closed state, first state) in which the game ball cannot enter due to the operation of the opening / closing member 370 (horizontal movement in the front-rear direction), and the game. It is configured as a variable entry port that can be changed to an entry-possible state (open state, second state) in which a ball can enter.

The second prize-winning device 360 is provided with a specific area that functions as a probabilistic operating port (probability change area), while the first prize-winning device 310 is not provided with such a specific area. That is, the second big prize device 360 (the second big prize opening 350) functions as a V attacker. The distribution of the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 350 into a specific area or a non-specific area is a movable piece based on the number of balls that have entered the second large winning opening 350, as in the above-mentioned Examples 1 and 2. (Distribution means) is operated, and the configuration (internal structure) of the second prize-winning device 360 is the same as that of the second prize-winning device 36 described with reference to FIG. 48.

In this embodiment, the second big winning opening 350 is opened only in the V round (7R) during the big hit game, and the first big winning opening 300 is opened in the rounds other than the V round (non-V round).

As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the inside of the first prize-winning device 310 and the vicinity of the first prize-winning device 310 on the back surface side of the game board 2 are around (nearby) the first prize-winning opening 300. ) Is provided with a plurality of first decorative LEDs 5a capable of illuminating. In this embodiment, a total of four first decorative LEDs 5a, two inside the first prize-winning device 310, one above the first prize-winning device 310, and one below the first prize-winning device 310. Is provided. The first decorative LED 5a is also a kind of board lamp 5 that decorates the game area 3 (board surface).

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the second big winning opening 350 is located inside the second big winning device 360 and on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the second big winning device 360. A plurality of second decorative LEDs 5b capable of illuminating the surrounding area (nearby) are provided. In this embodiment, a total of four second decorative LEDs 5b are provided, one inside the second prize-winning device 360 and one at the upper left, lower left, and lower right of the second prize-winning device 360. The second decorative LED 5b is also a kind of board lamp 5 that decorates the game area 3 (board surface).

As described in the first embodiment, the game board 2 is configured as a transparent game board, and the light emitted by the decorative LED can be visually recognized from the outside (the surface side of the game board). Further, in the first prize-winning device 310 and the second prize-winning device 360, the light emitted by the first decorative LED 5a and the second decorative LED 5b provided inside can be visually recognized from the outside (the surface side of the game board), respectively. , It is configured by using a member having translucency.

The number of the first decorative LED 5a and the second decorative LED 5b is not limited to this embodiment, and can be 3 or less or 5 or more, respectively, and the first decorative LED 5a and the second decorative LED 5b can be used. It is also possible to make the numbers different. Further, the place where the first decorative LED 5a and the second decorative LED 5b are provided is not limited to this embodiment. It is possible to provide an LED on a decorative member (not shown) provided so as to cover the front side of the winning device. In short, the number and location of the LEDs are not limited as long as they can illuminate the periphery (nearby) of the large winning opening (large winning device).

Here, the first decorative LED 5a is also referred to as a "first light emitting body", and the second decorative LED 5b is also referred to as a "second light emitting body", and either or both of the first decorative LED 5a and the second decorative LED 5b. Also referred to as a "decorative LED" or "light emitter".

Further, in this embodiment, the first large winning opening 300 is also referred to as a "first variable entry opening" or a "first special entry opening", and the second large winning opening 350 is referred to as a "second variable entry opening". Also called "ball mouth" or "second special ball entrance". Further, it refers to either or both of the first large winning opening 300 and the second large winning opening 350, and refers to the "large winning opening", the "variable entry opening", the "special entry opening", or the "specific entry opening". Also referred to as "large winning device", "variable ball entry device", "special entry device" or "specific entry device", which refers to either or both of the first major winning device 310 and the second major winning device 360. Also called "device".

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a big hit game in which a game ball is inserted into the big winning opening can be executed under the control of the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81, game control means). (Refer to special electric accessory processing (S1108), etc.). In this embodiment, the jackpot game and / or the round game is also referred to as a "specific game".

In this embodiment, when the specific game is executed, under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91, the effect control means), the decorative LEDs 5a and 5b emit light or the like (also referred to as “ball entrance light emission effect”). ) Is feasible. Hereinafter, the light emitting effect at the entrance of the ball of this embodiment will be described.

[Lighting effect at the entrance]
The entrance light emission effect is composed of the light emission of the decorative LED (light effect) and the display (display effect) of the effect image (also referred to as "light emission related image") associated with the light emission as the main effect elements, and is a big hit game. It is executed at the start of (big hit game state) or the start of a round game.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is a process for executing the ball entrance light emitting effect when the jackpot game is started after the stop display of the jackpot symbol and when each round game constituting the jackpot game is started. (Also referred to as "entrance light emission effect processing").

Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates lamp data for causing the first decorative LED 5a and the second decorative LED 5b to emit light as the ball entry port light emission effect process, and the created lamp data is used for the lamp data output process (S4202). ) To output. Further, a command for specifying a display pattern (display mode) of a light emission-related image (also referred to as a “light emission-related image display command”) is set in the output buffer of the RAM of the sub-control board 90, and this set command is used for command transmission processing. It is transmitted to the image control board 100 by (S4006).

The sub-control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) received the opening command from the main control board 80 in the entry light emission effect process (creation / output of lamp data and setting / transmission of light emission related image display commands). There are cases where the command is performed based on the above, and cases where the command is performed based on the reception of the round start command or the round end command from the main control board 80 by the sub control board 90 (the staging control microcomputer 91). The former corresponds to the entrance light emitting effect (also referred to as "first entrance light emitting effect") when the big hit game (big hit game state) is started (executed), and in the latter case, the round game is performed. Corresponds to the entry light emission effect (also referred to as "second entry port light emission effect") when the ball is started (executed).

When the ball entry port light emission effect process is performed based on the reception of the round start command, the ball entry port light emission effect process corresponds to the start round specified based on the received round start command, and the round ends. When the entrance light emission effect processing is performed based on the reception of the command, the entry port light emission effect processing corresponds to the next round (next start round) of the end round specified based on the received round end command. It becomes a process to do.

When the lamp data created by the entrance light emission effect processing is output by the lamp data output processing (S4202), the lamp control board 107 controls the first decorative LED 5a and / or the second decorative LED 5b according to the lamp data. As a result, the decorative LED to be emitted emits light in a predetermined color. The light emission (light emission pattern) at this time is realized, for example, by lighting, blinking, increasing or decreasing the brightness (brightness) of all or part of the decorative LEDs. In this embodiment, the emission color of the decorative LED in the ball entrance emission effect is white.

Further, when the light emission-related image display command set in the ball entry port light emission effect processing is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 is based on the received light emission-related image display command. The image data of the light emission-related image corresponding to the specified display pattern is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the effect display (also referred to as “light emission related effect display”) based on the read image data is the image display device 7. It is displayed on the display screen 7a.

The light emission-related image is one of the first decorative LED 5a and the second decorative LED 5b, for example, an image that emphasizes the light emission of the decorative LED (enhanced image), an image that represents light emission synchronized with the light emission of the decorative LED (light emitting image), and the like. Or the image can be related to both luminescence. Further, the light emission-related image includes a predetermined color as the main display color, and in this embodiment, the display color is white. That is, it is the same color as the emission color of the decorative LED. By doing so, it is possible to enhance (cultivate) the sense of unity between the light emission of the decorative LED and the display of the light emission-related image, and enhance the visual effect of the light emission effect at the entrance.

In this embodiment, both the emission color of the decorative LED and the display color of the emission-related image are white, but the color may be a color other than white, such as blue or red. Further, the emission color of the decorative LED and the display color of the emission-related image may be different.

Next, the first ball entrance light emitting effect executed at the start of the big hit game (big hit game state) will be described with reference to FIG. 56. The figure shows a main part of the game board surface (game area 3) after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed and before the first round of the jackpot game is started (that is, during the opening period).

Here, as the light emission pattern (light emission mode) of the decorative LED, three types of a first light emission pattern, a second light emission pattern, and a third light emission pattern are provided. Further, as a display pattern (display mode) of the light emission-related image (light emission-related effect display), three types of a first display pattern, a second display pattern, and a third display pattern are provided.

In the first light emission effect of the ball entrance, the decorative LED emits light in the first light emission pattern, and the light emission-related image is displayed in the first display pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56, the first decorative LED 5a provided around the first large winning opening 300 (first large winning device 310) and the second large winning opening 350 (second large winning device). All of the second decorative LEDs 5b provided around 360) emit light (light) (first light emission pattern). In addition to the light emission, the lower right area (the side closer to the large winning opening) of the display screen 7a (display area) is the first large winning opening 300 (first large winning device 350) and the second large winning opening. A light emission-related image 750 is displayed at a position above each of the mouth 350 (second prize winning device 360) (first display pattern). The light emission-related image 750 of the first display pattern is an effect image depicting how the light from the first decorative LED 5a and the second decorative LED 5b (first prize opening 300 and second prize opening 350) is diffused. ..

When the first ball entrance light emitting effect is executed, the area around the large winning opening in the game area 3 (right game area 3B) is illuminated by the white light of the decorative LED and becomes bright, and the lighting effect of the decorative LED emits light. It is complemented by the related effect display (light emission related image 750). As a result, the area around the big winning opening (big winning device) becomes conspicuous, and it becomes possible to raise the player's feelings toward the big hit game to be started from now on. In addition, it is possible to clarify the position of the large winning opening (large winning device).

In addition, during the opening period, a right-handed instruction effect is executed to instruct the player to launch the game ball toward the right game area 3B (specific area) (right-handed) together with the first ball entrance light emitting effect. Will be done.

Specifically, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the opening command from the main control board 80, the sub-control board issues a command (also referred to as a “right-handed instruction effect command”) for instructing the execution of the right-handed instruction effect. It is set in the output buffer of the RAM of 90, and the set command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006).

The image control microcomputer 101 reads the image data of the right-handed instruction image corresponding to the received right-handed instruction effect command from the ROM of the image control board 100, and displays the right-handed instruction effect based on the read image data. Is displayed on the display screen 7a of.

The right-handed instruction image can be, for example, a right-handed character, a right arrow, or an image reminiscent of a right-handed character. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, an image in which an illustration of "a hand pointing diagonally to the lower right" is arranged under the characters "Aim to the right!" Is used as a right-handed instruction image 751 and emits light. It is supposed to be displayed above the related image 750. The display of the right-handed instruction image 751 (right-handed instruction effect) is performed until the opening period ends. The right-handed instruction effect performed together with the first right-handed light emission effect is also referred to as "first right-handed instruction effect".

In addition to the light emission-related image 750 and the right-handed instruction image 751, the display screen 7a during the opening period shown in FIG. 56 displays an effect image of an opening effect (not shown).

Next, the second entrance light emitting effect executed at the start of the round game will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 shows the main part of the game board surface (game area 3) when the first round (non-V round) round game of the jackpot game is started, and FIG. 58 shows the seventh round (V round) of the jackpot game. ) Shows the main part of the game board surface (game area 3) when the round game is started.

The second ball entrance light emitting effect may be executed at the start of a round other than the V round (non-V round), or may be executed at the start of the V round. Hereinafter, the second entrance light emitting effect executed at the start of the non-V round is referred to as "second entrance light emitting effect A", and the second entrance light emitting effect executed at the start of the V round is referred to as "the second entrance light emitting effect". 2 It is referred to as "ball entrance light emitting effect B".

In the second entrance light emitting effect A, the decorative LED emits light in the second light emitting pattern, and the light emitting related image is displayed in the second display pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57, of the first decorative LED 5a and the second decorative LED 5b, only the first decorative LED 5a emits light (lights up) (second emission pattern). That is, the second decorative LED 5b does not emit light. In addition to the light emission of the first decorative LED 5a, the lower right area (the side closer to the big winning opening) of the display screen 7a (display area) of the first big winning opening 300 (first big winning device 350). A light emission-related image 750 is displayed at a position located above (second display pattern). The light emission-related image 750 of the second display pattern is an effect image depicting how the light from the first decorative LED 5a (first prize-winning opening 300) is diffused.

In FIG. 57, the second entrance light emitting effect A is executed at the start of the first round of the big hit game (opening of the first big winning opening 300), and then during the first round game (first big winning opening). (During the opening of 300) also shows how the second entrance light emitting effect A is continuously executed. Similarly, the second entrance light emitting effect A is executed for the round game (normal round game) in which the first large winning opening 300 other than the first round is opened.

When the second ball entrance light emitting effect A is executed, the area around the first prize opening 300 (first prize device 310) in the game area 3 (right game area 3B) is illuminated by the white light of the first decorative LED 5a. It is illuminated and brightened, and the effect of lighting by the first decorative LED 5a is enhanced by the light emission-related effect display (light emission-related image 750). As a result, the periphery of the first large winning opening 300 (first large winning device 310) becomes conspicuous, and the position of the first large winning opening 300 and the first large winning opening 300 are opened (open state). ) Can be clarified.

On the other hand, in the second entrance light emitting effect B, the decorative LED emits light in the third light emitting pattern, and the light emitting related image is displayed in the third display pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58, only the second decorative LED 5b of the first decorative LED 5a and the second decorative LED 5b emits light (lights up) (third light emitting pattern). That is, the first decorative LED 5a does not emit light. Further, together with the light emission of the second decorative LED 5b, the lower right area (the side closer to the big winning opening) of the display screen 7a (display area) of the second big winning opening 350 (second big winning device 360). A light emission-related image 750 is displayed at a position located above (third display pattern). The light emission-related image 750 of the third display pattern is an effect image depicting how the light from the second decorative LED 5b (second prize-winning opening 350) is diffused.

In FIG. 58, the second entrance light emitting effect B is executed at the start of the seventh round (V round) of the big hit game (opening of the second big winning opening 350), and then during the seventh round game (the second round). (While the two major winning openings 350 are open) also shows how the second entry opening light emitting effect B is continuously executed. The second entrance light emitting effect B is executed only in the 7th round (V round).

When the second entrance light emitting effect B is executed, the white light of the second decorative LED 5b is around the second large winning opening 350 (second large winning device 360) in the game area 3 (right game area 3B). It is illuminated and brightened, and the effect of lighting by the second decorative LED 5b is enhanced by the light emission-related effect display (light emission-related image 750). As a result, the area around the 2nd prize opening 350 (2nd prize device 350) becomes conspicuous, and the position of the 2nd prize opening 300 and the 2nd prize opening 300 are opened (open state). ) Can be clarified.

In particular, the second big winning opening 350 is a V attacker who is involved in determining whether or not a high probability state occurs after the big hit game, and for the player, the second big game ball is played in the V round related to the big hit scheduled to pass V. It is necessary to make sure that the ball enters the winning opening 350. In this respect, it is possible to prevent a disadvantageous situation for the player from occurring as much as possible, such as missing a ball into the second large winning opening 350 (V attacker) by executing the second entry opening light emitting effect B. Become.

Further, in the round in which the second entrance light emission effect (second entry port light emission effect A, second entry port light emission effect B) is executed, the right game area 3B (specification) is performed together with the second entry port light emission effect. A right-handed instruction effect is executed to instruct the player to shoot the game ball (right-handed) toward (the area of).

Specifically, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the first round start command (1R start command) from the main control board 80, the first round is performed before the start (opening period) of the first round. 1 A command (also referred to as a "second right-handed instruction effect command") for instructing execution of a right-handed instruction effect (also referred to as a "second right-handed instruction effect") instead of a right-handed instruction effect is a command of the sub-control board 90. It is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and this set command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006).

The image control microcomputer 101 reads the image data of the right-handed instruction image (also referred to as “second right-handed instruction image”) corresponding to the received second right-handed instruction effect command from the ROM of the image control board 100, and reads the image data. The second right-handed instruction effect based on the read image data is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The second right-handed instruction image can be, for example, a right-handed character, a right arrow, or an image reminiscent of right-handed characters. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, an image in which the figure of the “right arrow” is arranged under the characters “right-handed!” Is referred to as the second right-handed instruction image 752, and this is displayed. It is supposed to be displayed on a predetermined part of the screen 7a (upper right part in this embodiment). The display of the second right-handed instruction image 752 (second right-handed instruction effect) is performed at least until the jackpot game is completed.

Here, the second right-handed instruction image 752 that is continuously displayed at least until the jackpot game is completed has a display position closer to the outer periphery of the display screen 7a, and the size is also the first right-handed instruction image 751. It is said to be smaller than that of. This is excessively right-handed for a player who understands that it interferes with other effects and that right-handed is performed by displaying the first right-handed instruction image 751 (first right-handed instruction effect). This is to avoid giving instructions. On the contrary, the reason why the first right-handed instruction image 751 is made more conspicuous than the second right-handed instruction image 752 is to appeal to the player to start right-handedness from now on.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, in the round in which the second entrance light emission effect (second entry port light emission effect A, second entry port light emission effect B) is executed, each round is rounded. A round number image 753 showing the number is displayed on a predetermined portion (upper left portion in this embodiment) of the display screen 7a. Further, in the round in which the second entrance light emission effect (second entry port light emission effect A, second entry port light emission effect B) is executed, the light emission related image 750, the right-handed instruction image 752, and the round number image 753 are used. In addition, a staging image of a round staging (not shown) is displayed.

[Action and effect of Example 3]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment described above, when the big hit game or the round game (specific game) in which the game ball is inserted into the big winning opening (specific entry opening) is executed, the area around the big winning opening is The decorative LED (light emitting body) that illuminates emits light in a predetermined light emitting mode, and the light emission-related image associated with the light emission is displayed on the display screen 7a. For this reason, the player can confirm the position of the large winning opening (large winning device) in which the game ball should be entered by visually recognizing the light emitting effect of the entry opening when the specific game is executed. Become. This makes it possible to make it easier to understand the position of the big prize opening according to the execution (start) of the big hit game or the round game.

In particular, in this embodiment, the opening / closing members 320 and 370 that open and close the large winning openings 300 and 350 move horizontally in the front-rear direction perpendicular to the board surface. The opening / closing members 320, 370 that move horizontally in the front-rear direction are compared with the opening / closing members 32, 37 that rotate in the front-rear direction (change between an upright state and a tilted state) shown in the above-mentioned Examples 1 and 2. Therefore, it is difficult to understand its existence just by looking at the surface of the game board, and it is difficult for some players to grasp the position of the big winning opening (big winning device). This is because the opening / closing member that moves horizontally in the front-rear direction is thinner than the opening / closing member that rotates in the front-rear direction when the game board is viewed from the front (see FIGS. 3, 56, and the like). In this respect, it is possible to make up for such a defect by executing the ball-entry port light emitting effect as in the third embodiment.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, in the round game during the big hit game, when either one of the two big winning openings 300 and 350 is opened, the corresponding entry opening light emitting effect (second entry). Ball mouth light emission effect A or B) is executed. For this reason, it is possible to perform a ball-entry light emission effect according to the large winning opening (round) to be opened. This makes it possible to effectively produce a big hit game (round game) of a gaming machine equipped with two big winning openings.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the decorative LED (light emitter) emits white light in the ball entrance light emission effect, and the light emission-related image depicts how the white light from the decorative LED is diffused. It has become a thing. That is, the emission color of the decorative LED and the color (display color) included in the emission-related image are the same color (white in this embodiment). As a result, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the light emission of the decorative LED constituting the ball entry port light emission effect and the display of the light emission related image, and to enhance the visual effect of the ball entry port light emission effect.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the big winning opening (specific entry opening) changes from the closed state (first state) to the open state (second state) in the big hit game (round game). The entrance light emission effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the ball entry port emission effect at the timing when the game ball can enter the large winning opening. This makes it possible to increase the certainty of entering the ball into the large winning opening that can be changed between the closed state (first state) and the open state (second state). In particular, when the big winning opening is a V attacker, increasing the certainty of entering the V attacker makes it possible to prevent a disadvantageous situation for the player, which is particularly beneficial.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, a large winning opening (specific entry opening) is provided at a position in the gaming area 3 where a game ball flowing down the right gaming area 3B (specific area) can enter. Has been done. Then, when the ball entry port light emitting effect is executed, the right-handed instruction effect (first right-handed instruction effect, second right-handed instruction effect) instructing to launch the game ball toward the right game area 3B is executed. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to urge the player to appropriately launch the game ball in accordance with the execution of the ball entrance light emitting effect.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, in addition to the first decorative LED 5a and the second decorative LED 5b, the board decorative LED (board lamp 5) and the front frame provided on the board parts such as the center decorative body 10 are provided. The frame decoration LED (frame lamp 66) provided in the 51 is provided (see FIGS. 1, 5, and the like). It also refers to one or both of the board decoration LED and the frame decoration LED, and is also referred to as "another decorative LED" or "another light emitter". Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 can control the drive (light emission) of the other decorative LEDs, such as creating and outputting the lamp data related to the other decorative LEDs (S4202 and the like). reference).

In relation to this, in the third embodiment, when the first decorative LED 5a and / or the second decorative LED 5b is used to perform the light emitting effect of the entrance ball, the lamp effect (light effect) by the other decorative LEDs is more modest than usual. Or, the effect control microcomputer 91 may be configured to suppress the light emission of the other decorative LED, such as stopping a part or all of the lamp effect (light effect) by the other decorative LED.

Specifically, for example, during the execution of the ball entry port light emission effect, a part or all of the board decoration LED is turned off, or the brightness of a part or all of the board decoration LED is lowered. The effect control microcomputer 91 can be configured to control the light emission of the panel decoration LED as compared with the non-execution of the mouth light emission effect. According to such a configuration, the light emission of the board decoration LED is suppressed while the ball entry port light emitting effect is executed, so that the first decorative LED 5a and / Alternatively, the light emission of the second decorative LED 5b becomes more conspicuous, and it becomes possible to make the light emission effect of the entrance ball stand out.

In addition to the board decoration LED, part or all of the frame decoration LED may be turned off, or the brightness of part or all of the frame decoration LED may be reduced while the entrance light emitting effect is being executed. It is also possible to configure the effect control microcomputer 91 to control the light emission of the board decoration LED as compared with the non-execution of the ball entry port light emission effect. By doing so, the light emission of not only the board decoration LED but also the frame decoration LED is suppressed, so that it is possible to further emphasize the light emission effect of the entrance ball.

It should be noted that the emission suppression of the other decorative LEDs when the entrance light emission effect is executed may be performed at least on the board decoration LED, and the frame decoration LED may or may not be the target. The entrance light emission effect is an effect developed at least in the game board 2 (game area 3), and if the light emission of the board decoration LED is suppressed, the light emission of the first decorative LED 5a and the second decorative LED 5b is conspicuous. Is possible.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the big hit game or the round game in which the big winning opening is opened is executed, the entrance light emitting effect is executed. It is also possible to do it. For example, even if it is configured to execute the ball entry port light emitting effect when the auxiliary game (game per normal figure) opened by the second starting port 21 (variable starting port) based on the stop display of the hit normal symbol is executed. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand the position of the second starting port 21 that is opened in the auxiliary game (game per normal drawing). In this case, the auxiliary game (game per normal figure) corresponds to an example of "specific game".

In addition, the entry port (specific entry opening) that is the target of the light emission effect of the entry opening is a variable entry opening such as a large winning opening, as well as a non-first starting opening 20 and a general winning opening 27. It is also possible to use a variable entrance. For example, a decorative LED that illuminates the periphery (nearby) of the first starting port 20 is provided, and the ball entry port light emitting effect that causes the decorative LED to emit light is changed from a high base state (right-handed game state) to a low base state (left). It may be executed at the time of transition to the hitting game state). In this way, when the player returns the launch mode of the game ball (operation mode of the launch handle) to left-handed and aims to enter the first start port 20, the position of the first start port 20 is the aim. It is possible to make it easy to understand, and it is also possible to enhance the effect of the effect when shifting to the left-handed game state (when returning to the left-handed game).

Further, in the third embodiment, in the second entrance light emitting effect (second entry port light emitting effect A, B), one of the first decorative LED 5a and the second decorative LED 5b emits light (lights up) and the other does not emit light (lighting). Both the first decorative LED 5a and the second decorative LED 5b are supposed to be turned off), but one of the first decorative LED 5a and the second decorative LED 5b is brighter than the other (or one is darker than the other). May be made to emit light. This also makes it possible to make the light emission of the decorative LED corresponding to the open large winning opening of the two large winning openings 300 and 350 stand out.

Further, the ball entry port light emission effect of Example 3 can be applied not only to the V-probability machine but also to the symbol probabilistic machine, and is also applied to the type of pachinko gaming machine equipped with a small hit game in the V-probability machine and the symbol probabilistic machine. It is possible. When a small hit game is provided with a V probability machine or a symbol probability changer, it is also possible to execute a ball entry light emission effect for a large winning opening (attacker for small hits) opened in the small hit game. Furthermore, the light emitting effect at the entrance of the ball can be applied to a type 1 type 2 type mixer.

Although Examples 1 to 3 have been described above as embodiments of the present invention, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the wording of each claim is not deviated from the scope described in each claim. It is possible to add improvements based on the knowledge normally possessed by those skilled in the art, to the extent that those skilled in the art can easily replace them.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the seventh round of the jackpot game is a V round (specific round game), but the round in which the V round is executed may be any round, and the number of executions may be two or more.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the V round of the jackpot game related to the jackpot scheduled to pass through V, the V valid period is started (set) each time the movable piece 150 executes (starts) the first operation (S2704, S2708). On the other hand, in the V round of the jackpot game related to the jackpot scheduled to pass through V, since it is premised that the first operation of the movable piece 150 is performed twice, the V validity period starts with the first operation of the first operation. After (setting), the V valid period may be maintained until the movable piece 150 executes the second operation (until it becomes inactive). By doing so, since the start (setting) of the V validity period needs to be performed only once, the execution control of the V round can be simplified.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the operation pattern of the movable piece 150 in the V round, a short opening pattern that opens the specific area 39 for 80 ms (an operation pattern in which the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 is relatively low) is used. , A long opening pattern that operates the specific area 39 for a maximum of 23000 ms (an operation pattern that makes the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39 relatively high) is provided, but more operation patterns are provided. It may be prepared. For example, the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39, such as a pattern of opening the specific area 39 by 500 ms, a pattern of opening the specific area 39 by 1000 ms, a pattern of opening the specific area 39 by 2000 ms, and a pattern of opening the specific area 39 by 5000 ms. It is also possible to provide various operation patterns that can be changed more finely. That is, the number of balls entering the V attacker (third predetermined value C3) that triggers the execution of the second operation of the movable piece 150 in the operating state is finely set (plural) in consideration of the opening time of those specific areas 39. It is also possible to do. By doing so, it is possible to set various possibilities for passing V in the V round, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the V round.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the number of balls entered into the V attacker (counted value by the number of balls entered counting means) becomes "1" in both the V rounds of the V-passing jackpot and the V-non-passing jackpot. Although the first operation of the movable piece 150 is performed in the short opening pattern, it is not necessary to provide the first operation of the movable piece 150 in the short opening pattern for the jackpot scheduled to pass through V. This is because the jackpot scheduled to pass V is a jackpot that is premised on passing V in the V round.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation of the movable piece 150 is controlled based on the number of balls entered into the V attacker (second large winning opening 35) during the V round, and the operation pattern of the movable piece 150 (short opening pattern or The possibility of passing through V is made different (easy to pass through V or difficult to pass through V) depending on the long opening pattern). On the other hand, as the V attacker opening pattern, it is possible to provide a short opening pattern that makes it difficult to enter the V attacker and a long opening pattern that makes it easy to enter the V attacker. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine provided with the above.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, it is assumed that the number of rounds of the jackpot game has two types of "7R" and "15R", but the number of rounds is not limited to this, and the number of rounds (that is, that is). , The type of big hit) can be 3 or more types, or only 1 type. Further, the opening patterns of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 (V attacker) are not limited to the above-described embodiment, for example, the opening time and the number of opening times per round, in each round. Various modes can be adopted for the type of the large winning opening to be opened, the order of opening, and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is exemplified in which a player is given a game privilege of generating a high probability state based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the V round during the big hit game. , The privilege referred to in the present invention is not limited to the occurrence of a high probability state. For example, it gives some benefit to the player, such as a high base state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port is high, and a fluctuation time shortening state (time reduction state) in which the fluctuation time of the identification information is shorter than usual. If so, the content (type) of the privilege does not matter. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area, one privilege may be given or a plurality of privileges may be given.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the value set in the probability variation counter based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area is set to "100", and when the number of executions of the special symbol winning / failing determination in the high probability state becomes "100", As a gaming machine (so-called "V-probability ST machine") with specifications that the special symbol winning / failing judgment from the next time onward is performed in a low-probability state, that is, a high-probability state is not always guaranteed until the next big hit occurs. However, the value set in the probability variation counter can be appropriately set according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

For example, in order to generate a high probability state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area, "10000" is set in the probability variation counter, and the number of executions of the special symbol winning / failing determination reaches 10,000 times (substantially). The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine (so-called "V-probability loop machine") having specifications that guarantee a high probability state (until the next big hit occurs). Alternatively, in addition to the probability variation counter, for example, a counter (big hit counter) that counts the number of big hits in a high probability state is provided, and the number of big hits (count value of the big hit counter) becomes a predetermined number (for example, "5"). Then, after the end of the jackpot game related to the predetermined number of jackpots (for example, the "fifth"), the game machine (so-called "V-probability set machine") with the specification that the probability is always (forced) low. The invention is applicable.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the digestion of the second special symbol hold (variable display of the second special symbol) is prioritized over the digestion of the first special symbol hold (variable display of the first special symbol) (so-called "". "Priority digestion" and "priority change"), but it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which the digestion of the first special symbol hold (variation display of the first special symbol) and the digestion of the second special symbol hold (variation display of the second special symbol) are performed in the order of starting and entering the ball, or the first special symbol hold It may be configured to perform digestion and digestion on hold of the second special figure in parallel (so-called “simultaneous digestion”, “simultaneous fluctuation”). Further, the digestion of the first special symbol reservation (variation display of the first special symbol) may be prioritized over the digestion of the second special symbol reservation (variation display of the second special symbol).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by inactivating / operating the probability fluctuation function, but the type (number) of the jackpot probability is It is not limited to this, and even if it is possible to set three or more types of probabilities, for example, a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). good. Further, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , Multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability are provided, and any of the multiple types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable) when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, for example. May be good.

[others]
Hereinafter, the inventions related to the embodiments (Examples) disclosed in the present specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
Conventionally, when a game ball passes through a specific area in the V attacker during a big hit game executed based on the judgment of a big hit in the big hit determination, the probability of being determined as a big hit becomes higher than usual. The game machine that causes it is known. This type of gaming machine includes a mechanism for distributing a gaming ball that has entered a V-attacker to a specific region or a non-specific region. Specifically, for example, a lid member that opens and closes a specific area is provided inside the V attacker, and when the lid member moves to the open position, the specific area is opened and the game ball can pass through the specific area. When the lid member returns to the closed position, the specific area is closed and the game ball cannot pass through the specific area. Then, depending on the length of the time during which the specific area is open (opening time), the passability (passage rate) of the game ball to the specific area may increase or decrease (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-245172). See).

In a gaming machine provided with a specific area as described above, when the opening time when the specific area is in the open state is relatively long, it is natural that the gaming ball passes through the specific area, but the opening time is natural. Even if it is relatively short, it is possible that the gaming ball passes through a specific area. That is, there are normal passage and non-normal passage in the passage of the game ball to the specific area. Therefore, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it is desirable to be able to confirm whether or not the passage is normal.

The present reference invention 1 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is a game in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the passage of a game ball has passed a specific area. It is to provide an opportunity.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
Judgment means that can execute judgment based on game ball detection,
A game state control means capable of controlling the game state when the determination is executed, and
When the result of the determination is a specific result, a special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be given to the player, and a special game execution means.
A special entrance that allows the game ball to enter during the special game,
A distribution means for distributing the game ball that has entered the special entrance to a specific area or an area other than the specific area.
A distribution operation control means capable of controlling the operation of the distribution means,
A predetermined notification executing means capable of executing a predetermined notification regarding the passage of the game ball to the specific area is provided.
The gaming state includes a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
The game state control means
When the game ball that has entered the special entrance in the special game does not pass through the specific area, the game state after the special game is defined as the first game state.
When the game ball that has entered the special entrance in the special game passes through the specific area, the game state after the special game is defined as the second game state.
The operation mode of the distribution means includes a first operation mode and a second operation mode in which the game ball is more easily distributed to the specific area than the first operation mode.
The distribution operation control means may operate the distribution means in the first operation mode or the second operation mode during the special game.
The predetermined notification execution means is
When the distribution means does not operate in the second operating mode but operates in the first operating mode and the game ball passes through the specific region during the special game, the first passing situation occurs. It is possible to execute the first predetermined notification for notifying the occurrence of the first passing situation for a predetermined period after the situation occurs.
When the sorting means operates in the second operating mode and the game ball passes through the specific area during the special game, a predetermined period after the second passing situation occurs. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a second predetermined notification for notifying the occurrence of the second passage status.

According to such a gaming machine, during the special game in which the game ball can enter the special entrance, the distribution means does not operate in the second operating mode but operates in the first operating mode and the game. When the first passing situation in which the sphere passes through the specific area occurs, the first predetermined notification for notifying the occurrence of the first passing situation can be executed for a predetermined period after the first passing situation occurs. .. Further, when the distribution means operates in the second operating mode and the game ball passes through the specific area during the special game, the second passing situation occurs, and the second passing situation occurs for a predetermined period after the second passing situation occurs. 2 The second predetermined notification for notifying the occurrence of the passage status can be executed. Therefore, in a predetermined period after the occurrence of the first passage situation or the second passage situation, the player, the person concerned with the game hall, etc. can confirm the occurrence of the first passage situation or the second passage situation. .. Here, it can be said that the first passing situation is a situation in which the game ball passes through the specific area even though the possibility that the game ball is distributed to the specific area is relatively low, and it is not a normal passing situation. On the other hand, the second passing situation is a situation in which the game ball passes through the specific area while the possibility that the game ball is distributed to the specific area is relatively high, and it can be said that it is a normal passing situation. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the passage of the game ball when it has passed through the specific area is a normal passage through the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 described above.
The determination is based on the first determination executed based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the predetermined first determination entrance and the detection of the game ball that has entered the predetermined second determination entrance. There is a second judgment that is executed
The special game executing means can execute the special game when the result of the first determination or the second determination is the specific result.
A determination notification executing means capable of executing a determination notification for notifying which of the first determination and the second determination is executed when the special game is executed is provided.
The determination notification executing means is characterized in that the determination notification can be executed at least for a predetermined period after the first passage situation occurs.

According to such a gaming machine, the result of the first determination or the second determination executed based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the first determination entry slot (the detection of entry into the first determination entry slot). A special game is executed when the result of the second determination executed based on the detection of the game ball entering the determination entry slot (the detection of entry into the second determination entry slot) is a specific result. Then, the determination notification for notifying whether the execution trigger of the special game is the first determination or the second determination when the special game is executed is at least in a predetermined period after the first passage situation occurs. It is feasible. For this reason, when a first passing situation (in other words, an abnormal passing situation) that is not a normal passing situation occurs, the player, a person involved in the game hall, etc., is given a special game when the first passing situation occurs. It is possible to confirm whether the judgment is based on the first judgment or the second judgment. This makes it possible to confirm the game situation in more detail when the first passing situation occurs.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 or 1-2 described above.
A passing effect executing means capable of executing a passing effect based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area during the special game is provided.
The passage effect executing means is
If the sorting means does not operate in the second operating mode and the game ball passes through the specific area during the special game, the passing effect based on the passing cannot be executed. can be,
When the distribution means operates in the second operation mode during the special game and the game ball passes through the specific area, the passage effect based on the passage can be executed. ..

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a passing effect based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area during a special game. Then, when the game ball passes through the specific region even though the sorting means does not operate in the second operating mode and operates in the first operating mode during the special game (that is, when the first passing situation occurs). , The passage effect based on the passage is not executed. On the other hand, when the distribution means operates in the second operation mode during the special game and the game ball passes through the specific area (that is, when the second passage situation occurs), the passage effect based on the passage is executed. .. For this reason, for the first passing situation that is not a normal passing situation, the occurrence of the game ball passing to a specific area is not appealed, while for the second passing situation that is a normal passing situation, a game to a specific area is made. It is possible to appeal the occurrence of ball passage. This makes it possible to appropriately produce the passage of the game ball to a specific area.

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of confirming whether or not the passage is a normal passage when the gaming ball passes through a specific area.

(Reference Invention 2)
Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of causing a probabilistic state in which the probability of winning a jackpot changes from a low probability to a high probability after the end of a jackpot game based on winning a jackpot in a symbol variation game (win lottery), the probability. It is known that an effect mode including a latent effect mode for notifying a player that there is a possibility of a state can be set (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The latent effect mode is an effect mode that makes it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the player is in the stochastic state, and makes it possible to create a game property in which the probabilistic state is hidden. Further, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to set a probability variation effect mode for notifying the player that the gaming machine is in a stochastic state. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-9841).

However, the game nature of hiding the probabilistic state like the latent effect mode has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and there is room for further improvement in order to improve the gaming interest.

The present reference invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with improved gaming interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game that gives a predetermined game profit to a player based on the fact that the specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display of the identification information.
A game state control means capable of controlling the game state in which the variation display is executed, and
A staging mode control means capable of controlling a staging mode in which the staging accompanying the variable display is executed is provided.
The specific display result includes a first specific display result and a second specific display result.
The gaming state includes a first gaming state in which the probability that the specific display result is derived is a predetermined probability, and a second gaming state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined probability.
The effect mode corresponding to the first game state includes at least the first effect mode.
The game state control means
The first game state is set as the game state after the special game based on the derivation of the first specific display result.
The second game state is set as the game state after the special game based on the derivation of the second specific display result.
The effect mode control means is used as the effect mode after the special game.
When the first specific display result is derived in the first game state and the first effect mode and the game state after the special game is set to the first game state based on the first specific display result, the first effect mode is set. Set a different second production mode from
When the second specific display result is derived in the first game state and the first effect mode and the game state after the special game is set to the second game state based on the second specific display result, the first effect mode is set. And a third effect mode different from the second effect mode is set.
When the first specific display result is derived in the second game state and the third effect mode and the game state after the special game is set to the first game state based on the first specific display result, the third effect mode is set. And set
When the second specific display result is derived in the second game state and the third effect mode and the game state after the special game is set to the second game state based on the second specific display result, the third effect mode is set. It is characterized by setting.

According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state is the first gaming state and the staging mode is the first staging mode (first gaming state and first staging mode), the first specific is specified as the display result of the variable display. When the display result is derived, the game state after the special game becomes the first game state and the effect mode becomes the second effect mode (first game state and second effect mode). Further, when the second specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display in the first game state and the first effect mode, the game state after the special game becomes the second game state and the effect mode is triggered by this. Is the third effect mode (second game state and third effect mode). That is, when the specific display result is derived in the first game state and the first effect mode, and the specific display result is the second specific display result (in other words, the game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state. Only in the case of transitioning to), the transition to the third effect mode is performed. The third effect mode in this case is an effect mode in which the second gaming state is determined.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is the second gaming state and the staging mode is the third staging mode (second gaming state and third staging mode), the first specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display. With this as an opportunity, the game state after the special game becomes the first game state and the effect mode becomes the third effect mode (first game state and third effect mode). Further, when the second specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display in the second game state and the third effect mode, the game state after the special game becomes the second game state and the effect mode is triggered by this. Is the third effect mode (second game state and third effect mode). That is, when the specific display result is derived in the third effect mode, the third effect mode is maintained regardless of the type of the specific display result (in other words, the type of the gaming state after the special game). In this case, the third effect mode is an effect mode in which it is uncertain that the state is the second game state (it is unknown whether or not the state is the second game state).

In this way, even in the same third effect mode, the meaning of the third effect mode differs depending on the game state and the effect mode when the specific display result that triggers the setting of the third effect mode is derived. It will be a thing. As a result, using the same effect mode (third effect mode), the player is given a sense of security that the second game state is confirmed and a feeling of excitement that it is not known whether or not the player is in the second game state. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 described above.
The effect mode control means is used as the effect mode after the special game.
When the first specific display result is derived in the first game state and the third effect mode and the game state after the special game is set to the first game state based on the first specific display result, the third effect mode is set. And set
When the second specific display result is derived in the first game state and the third effect mode and the game state after the special game is set to the second game state based on the second specific display result, the third effect mode is set. It is characterized by setting.

According to such a gaming machine, when the first specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display in the first gaming state and the third staging mode, the gaming state after the special game becomes the first. As the game state is entered, the effect mode becomes the third effect mode (first game state and third effect mode). Further, when the second specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display in the first game state and the third effect mode, the game state after the special game becomes the second game state and the effect mode is triggered by this. Is the third effect mode (second game state and third effect mode). That is, when the specific display result is derived in the first game state and the third effect mode, the third effect mode is maintained regardless of the type of the specific display result (in other words, the type of the game state after the special game). Will be done. In this case, the third effect mode is an effect mode in which it is uncertain that the state is the second game state (it is unknown whether or not the state is the second game state).

Therefore, as long as the derivation of the specific display result is repeated in the third effect mode (so-called "ream villa") after the third effect mode is set once, the player may or may not be in the second game state. The game will be advanced under unknown circumstances. This makes it possible to further improve the game entertainment after the third staging mode is set.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or 2-2 described above.
The effect mode control means is used as the effect mode after the special game.
When the first specific display result is derived in the first game state and the second effect mode and the game state after the special game is set to the first game state based on the first specific display result, the second effect mode is set. And set
When the second specific display result is derived in the first game state and the second effect mode and the game state after the special game is set to the second game state based on the second specific display result, the third effect mode is set. It is characterized by setting.

According to such a gaming machine, when the first specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display in the first gaming state and the second staging mode, the gaming state after the special game becomes the first. As the game state is entered, the effect mode becomes the second effect mode (first game state and second effect mode). Further, when the second specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display in the first game state and the second effect mode, the game state after the special game becomes the second game state and the effect mode is triggered by this. Is the third effect mode (second game state and third effect mode). That is, when the specific display result is derived in the first game state and the second effect mode, and the specific display result is the second specific display result (the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state). Case) only, the mode shifts to the third staging mode. Therefore, even when the mode is changed from the second effect mode to the third effect mode, the third effect mode is the effect mode in which the second game state is confirmed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the second gaming state is confirmed when the second staging mode is changed to the third staging mode.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 2-1 to 2-3 described above.
The effect mode control means is
When the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times in the first gaming state and in the third effect mode without deriving the specific display result, the third effect mode is ended and the first effect mode is set. It is characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, when a predetermined number of variable displays are executed without deriving a specific display result as a display result of the variable display in the first gaming state and the third effect mode, the predetermined number of times is displayed. The third effect mode ends with the execution of the variable display of, and the mode shifts to the first effect mode. That is, it returns to the first gaming state and the first effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to clarify the end of the third staging mode. As a result, it is possible to give the game a sharpness by preventing the game in the third staging mode from continuing unnecessarily.

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improved gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 3)
Conventionally, it is provided with a plurality of entrances through which a game ball flowing down a game area formed on the surface of a game board can enter, and is configured to hit the game ball to the left and right of the game area according to the game state. Gaming machines are known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). A game ball is inserted into a plurality of entrances of this type of gaming machine when specific conditions are satisfied, such as a second start winning opening and a special winning opening described in Patent Document 1. The entrance (also referred to as "specific entrance") is included.

In recent gaming machines, it is difficult to know the position of a specific entrance as described above due to the influence of the larger display screen located in the substantially center of the gaming board and the diversification of board decoration. For this reason, it may be difficult for some players to find a specific entry slot, and there is a risk of causing disadvantages to the player, such as the inability to promptly allow the game ball to enter the specific entry slot.

The present reference invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the position of a specific entry port is easy to understand.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
It is a gaming machine that shoots gaming balls toward the gaming board and plays games.
A display screen that can be seen from the surface side of the game board,
A plurality of entrances through which a game ball flowing down a game area formed on the surface of the game board can enter, and
A light emitting body capable of illuminating the vicinity of a specific entry port among the plurality of entry openings, and
A game control means that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a staging control means that can control the staging associated with the game,
The game control means can execute a specific game in which a game ball is inserted into the specific entrance.
The effect control means can execute a ball-entry port light emission effect of causing the light emitter to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode and displaying a light emission-related image associated with the light emission on the display screen when the specific game is executed. It is characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, a ball entry port light emitting effect is executed when a specific game in which a game ball is inserted into a specific entry opening is executed. The ball entry port light emission effect is an effect in which a light emitting body that illuminates the periphery of a specific ball entry port emits light in a predetermined light emission mode, and a light emission-related image associated with the light emission is displayed on the display screen. Therefore, when the specific game is executed, the player confirms the position of the entry port (specific entry port) at which the game ball should be entered in the specific game by visually recognizing the light emission effect of the entry port. It becomes possible to do. This makes it possible to make it easier to understand the position of a specific entry port according to the execution of a specific game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 described above.
The predetermined light emitting mode includes a mode in which the light emitting body emits light in a predetermined color.
The emission-related image is characterized by containing the same color as the emission color of the illuminant.

According to such a gaming machine, the emission color of the light emitting body and the color (display color) included in the emission-related image are the same color in the light emission effect of the entrance ball. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the light emission of the light emitting body constituting the ball entry port light emission effect and the display of the light emission related image, and to enhance the visual effect of the ball entry port light emission effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or 3-2 described above.
The specific entry port can be changed into a first state in which the game ball cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and the second state can be obtained by executing the specific game. To be
The effect control means is characterized in that the effect of emitting light from the ball entry port can be executed when the specific ball entry port is in the second state.

According to such a gaming machine, a specific entrance for entering a gaming ball in a specific game is divided into a first state in which the gaming ball cannot be entered and a second state in which the gaming ball can be entered. It is configured as a variable entrance (variable entrance). Then, when the specific entrance port changes from the first state to the second state due to the execution of the specific game, the entrance light emission effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the ball entry port emission effect at the timing when the game ball can enter the specific entry port. This makes it possible to increase the certainty of entering a ball into a specific entry port (variable entry port) that can be changed between the first state and the second state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-3 described above.
The specific entry port is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the specific area of the game area can enter.
The effect control means is characterized in that, when executing the ball entry port light emission effect, it is possible to execute an instruction effect instructing the game ball to be launched toward the specific area.

According to such a gaming machine, a specific entry port is provided at a position where a gaming ball flowing down a specific area of the gaming area can enter. Then, when the ball entry port light emitting effect is executed, the instruction effect for instructing the game ball to be launched toward a specific area is executed. As a result, it is possible to promote the appropriate launch of the game ball in accordance with the execution of the ball entrance light emitting effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-4 described above.
In addition to the illuminant, another illuminant for decoration is provided.
The effect control means is characterized in that it is possible to suppress the light emission of the other light emitting body when the effect of emitting light from the entrance of the ball is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, when the ball entrance light emitting effect is executed, the light emission of a decorative light emitting body (another light emitting body) provided separately from the light emitting body that illuminates the vicinity of a specific ball entrance port is emitted. It will be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to make the light emitting effect of the ball entry port stand out, and by extension, it is possible to make the position of a specific ball entry port more easily understood.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 3, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the position of a specific entrance is easy to understand.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game area, 4 rail member, 5 board surface lamp, 5a 1st decorative LED, 5b 2nd decorative LED, 7 image display device, 7a display screen, 20 1st start port, 21st 2 Starting port, 30 1st big winning opening, 30a 1st big winning opening sensor, 31 1st big winning device, 32 opening / closing member, 33 1st big winning opening solenoid, 35 2nd big winning opening, 35a 2nd big winning Mouth sensor, 36 2nd prize winning device, 37 opening / closing member, 38 2nd prize opening solenoid, 39 specific area, 39a specific area sensor, 40 main display, 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special symbol display unit) ), 41b 2nd special symbol display (2nd special symbol display), 48 hit display, 49 non-specific area, 80 main control board (main control unit), 81 game control microcomputer, 90 sub control board (secondary) Control unit), 91 Production control microcomputer, 100 Image control board (image control unit), 101 Image control microcomputer, 107 Lamp control board, 150 movable piece, 151 movable piece solenoid, 300 1st prize opening, 310 1st Large prize device, 320 opening / closing member, 350 2nd large winning opening, 360 2nd large winning device, 370 opening / closing member, 750 light emission related image.

Claims (1)

The main control unit that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control unit that controls the effect based on the command transmitted from the main control unit,
A special entrance that allows the game ball to enter during the special game,
A distribution member for distributing a game ball that has entered the special entrance to a specific area or an area other than the specific area is provided.
The main control unit
Judgment means that can execute judgment based on game ball detection,
A gaming state control means capable of controlling the gaming state when the determination is executed to a first gaming state or a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state .
When the result of the determination is a specific result, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game that can give a predetermined game profit to the player and a special game execution means .
A distribution operation control means capable of controlling the operation of the distribution member is provided.
The sub-control unit includes a predetermined notification executing means capable of executing a predetermined notification regarding the passage of the game ball to the specific area.
The game state control means
When the game ball that has entered the special entrance in the special game does not pass through the specific area, the game state after the special game is defined as the first game state.
When the game ball that has entered the special entrance in the special game passes through the specific area, the game state after the special game is defined as the second game state.
The distribution operation control means operates the distribution member in the first operation mode during the special game, and the second operation mode in which the game ball is more easily distributed to the specific region than in the first operation mode. There are cases where it is operated by
The main control unit
When the distribution member does not operate in the second operating mode but operates in the first operating mode and the game ball passes through the specific region during the special game, the first passing situation occurs. The first passage status command corresponding to the status is transmitted to the sub-control unit, and the command is transmitted to the sub-control unit.
When the distribution member operates in the second operation mode and the game ball passes through the specific area during the special game, a second passage status command corresponding to the second passage status occurs. To the sub-control unit
The predetermined notification execution means is
Based on the first passing status command, the first predetermined notification for notifying the occurrence of the first passing status can be executed in a predetermined period after the occurrence of the first passing status .
A gaming machine characterized in that, based on the second passage status command, the second predetermined notification for notifying the occurrence of the second passage status can be executed in a predetermined period after the occurrence of the second passage status. ..

Images